HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpectrum Carmel Footings Specification.pdf
Carmel Senior Living
SW quadrant of 136th Street and Illinois Street
Carmel, Indiana
Spectrum Retirement Communities, LLC
Project Manual
Division 1-16
Footings and Foundation Documents
31 May 2013
Project Number: 2013.037
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
Specification Responsibility:
I, Michael J. Falbe, Indiana registered Engineer 10403978, do hereby accept professional responsibility for
the attached specification sections 03100 –03532, and 05120. I hereby disclaim any responsibility for all
other specifications included in these construction documents, they being the responsibility of the design
professionals whose names and signed statements appear hereinafter.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 – PROJECT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00310 Available Project Information 00720 General Conditions 00730 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 Summary
01210 Allowances 01230 Alternates 01250 Contract Modification Procedures
01290 Payment Procedures 01310 Project Management and Coordination 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01330 Submittal Procedures
01400 Quality Requirements 01420 References 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01600 Product Requirements 01635 Substitution Procedures 01700 Execution Requirements
01770 Closeout Procedures 01781 Project Record Documents 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 01810 General Commissioning Requirements
DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCITON 02361 Termite Control
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03100 Concrete Forming and Accessories
03200 Concrete Reinforcing 03300 Cast-In Place Concrete 03380 Post-tensioned Concrete
03390 Concrete Curing 03532 Concrete Floor Topping
DIVISION 4 – NOT USED
DIVISION 5 – METALS
05120 Structural Steel Framing
DIVISION 6 – NOT USED DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Building Insulation
DIVISION 8 – NOT USED
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2
DIVISION 9 – NOT USED
DIVISION 10 – NOT USED
DIVISION 11 – NOT USED
DIVISION 12 – NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - NOT USED
DIVISION 14 – NOT USED
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15010 Plumbing Provisions
15050 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 15100 Piping 15300 Fire Protection System 15400 Plumbing
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical Provisions
16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16120 Wire and Cable 16450 Grounding
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION &
GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS
SPECTRUM RETIREMENT COMMUNITY
CARMEL, INDIANA
A&W PROJECT NO: 13IN0473
PREPARED BY:
ALT & WITZIG ENGINEERING, INC.
GEOTECHNICAL DIVISION
PREPARED FOR:
SPECTRUM RETIREMENT COMMUNITIES, LLC.
DENVER, COLORADO
SEPTEMBER 18, 2013
September 18, 2013
Spectrum Retirement Communities, LLC.
200 Spruce Street, Suite 200
Denver, Colorado 80230
Attn: Mr. Andrew Royster
RE: Subsurface Investigation &
Geotechnical Recommendations
Spectrum Retirement Community
Carmel, Indiana
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Dear Mr. Royster:
In compliance with your request, we have conducted a subsurface investigation and
evaluation for the above referenced project. It is our pleasure to transmit herewith two (2) copies of
our report.
The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the various soils profile
components, the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials, and to provide criteria
for use by the design engineers in assessing the site for construction, preparation of site grading
plans, and determination of appropriate foundation types for the proposed residential
development.
A detailed discussion of our subsurface investigation results and recommendations are
presented herein.
We appreciated the opportunity to work with you on this project. Often, because of design
and construction details that occur, questions arise concerning the soils conditions. If we can give
further service in these matters, please contact us at your convenience.
Very truly yours,
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
William Ellis
Project Manager
Thomas J. Coffey, P.E.
A lt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
4105 West 99th Street • Carmel, Indiana 46032
(317) 875-7000 • Fax (317) 876-3705
Offices:
Cincinnati, Ohio • Dayton, Ohio
Indianapolis • Evansville • Ft. Wayne • Lafayette • South Bend • Terre Haute, Indiana
Subsurface Investigation and Foundation Engineering
Construction Materials Testing and Inspection
Environmental Services
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 1
DESCRIPTION OF SITE ................................................................................................................... 2
FIELD INVESTIGATION .................................................................................................................. 4
LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS ................................................................................................ 6
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 7
GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................. 9
CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................ 13
SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................................... 15
APPENDIX
Recommended Specifications for Compacted Fills and Backfills
Excavation Details in Unstable Material
Site Location Map
Boring Location Plan
Records of Subsurface Exploration
General Notes
Soil Survey Map of Hamilton County
F:\Projects\13\13IN0473\Geo Good\13IN0473 Geotech Report.docx
1
Alt & Witzig File:13IN0473
SSUUBBSSUURRFFAACCEE IINNVVEESSTTIIGGAATTIIOONN
AANNDD
GGEEOOTTEECCHHNNIICCAALL RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDAATTIIOONNSS
INTRODUCTION
General
This report presents the results of a subsurface investigation performed for the Spectrum
Retirement Community in Carmel, Indiana. Our investigation was conducted for Spectrum
Retirement Communities, LLC. of Denver, Colorado. Authorization to perform this investigation
was in the form of an accepted proposal by Mr. Andrew Royster on behalf of Spectrum
Retirement Communities, LLC.
The scope of this investigation included a review of geological maps of the area and a
review of geologic and related literature; a reconnaissance of the immediate site; a subsurface
exploration; field and laboratory testing; and engineering analysis and evaluation of the materials.
The purpose of this subsurface investigation was to determine the various soils profile
components, the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials, and to provide criteria for
use in assessing the site for construction and designing foundations for the proposed residential
development.
The scope or purpose of this geotechnical investigation did not include, either specifically
or by implication, an environmental assessment of the site.
2
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
DESCRIPTION OF SITE
Site Location
The site currently consists of approximately eleven (11) acres of largely undeveloped
land located in Carmel, Indiana. Specifically, the site is located in the southwest corner of the
intersection of Illinois Street and W. 136th Street. The area may be located using the Carmel,
Indiana 7½ Minute Topographic Map in the northeast quadrant of Section 26, Township 18
North and Range 3 East. The general vicinity of the site is indicated in the Site Location Map
included in the Appendix of this report. An aerial photograph of the site taken in 2010 is
provided in Figure 1 below.
Figure 1
Oil Pipeline
3
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Site Topography and Drainage
The site is gently to steeply sloped down towards the east. The relief across the site is
approximately twenty (20) feet with maximum and minimum elevations of approximately 870
and 850 feet, respectively.
Drainage is primarily along the ground surface into low lying areas and ultimately towards a
a ditch line located southeast of the site. The site is located between a lift station that exists off site
to the west, an abandoned oil product pipeline that bisects the site running northeast to southwest,
and the eastern extent of the site. The site consisted of a fallow field with tall grass and sparse to
medium dense wooded areas.
The surrounding area is developed with overhead and underground utilities, paved roads,
and numerous residential and commercial structures.
4
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
FIELD INVESTIGATION
General
Field investigations to determine the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials
included a reconnaissance of the project site and performing seven (7) borings located
approximately as shown on the Boring Location Plan, performing standard penetration tests, and
obtaining soil samples retained in the standard spilt-spoon sampler for further laboratory testing.
The apparent groundwater level at each boring location was also determined.
Drilling and Sampling Procedures
The soil borings were drilled using an all-terrain vehicle mounted drilling rig equipped
with a rotary head. Hollow-stem augers were used to advance the holes. The advancement of
the borings was temporarily stopped at regular intervals in order to perform standard penetration
tests in accordance with ASTM Procedure D-1586.
The standard penetration test involves driving a split spoon soil sampler into the ground by
dropping a 140-pound hammer, thirty (30) inches. The number of hammer drops required to
advance the split-spoon sampler one (1) foot into the soil is defined as the standard penetration
value. The soil samples retained in the split-spoon sampling device as a result of the penetration
tests were obtained, classified, and labeled for further laboratory investigation.
Water Level Measurements
The apparent groundwater level at each boring location was measured during and upon
completion of after the drilling operations.
These water level measurements consisted of observing the depth at which water was
encountered on the drilling rods during the soil sampling procedure and measuring the depth to the
top of any water following removal of the hollow stem augers. It should be noted that the
groundwater level measurements recorded on the individual Records of Subsurface Exploration in
the Appendix of this report are accurate only for the specific dates on which the measurements were
performed. It must be understood that the groundwater levels will fluctuate throughout the year and
the Records of Subsurface Exploration do not indicate these fluctuations.
5
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Ground Surface Elevation
Ground surface elevations at each individual boring location were not available at the time
of this report. All depths noted in this report and reported on the Records of Subsurface
Exploration are in reference to the ground surface existing at the time of the boring operations.
6
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS
In addition to the field investigations, a supplemental laboratory investigation was
conducted to ascertain additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials at
the site of the Spectrum Retirement Community.
All phases of the laboratory investigation were conducted in accordance with applicable
ASTM Specifications. The laboratory testing program included a supplemental visual classification
and water content tests on most of the cohesive samples.
Selected samples of the cohesive soil from the spoon-sampling device were tested in
unconfined compression by use of a calibrated spring testing machine. In addition, a calibrated soil
penetrometer was used as an aid in determining the strength of the soil. The values of the
unconfined compressive strength as determined on soil samples from the split-spoon sampling must
be considered approximate. It must be recognized that split-spoon sampling techniques provide a
representative but somewhat disturbed soil sample.
7
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
General
The types of foundation materials encountered have been visually classified and are
described in detail on the Records of Subsurface Exploration. The results of the field penetration
tests, strength tests, water level observations and laboratory water contents are presented on the
Records of Subsurface Exploration in numerical form. Representative samples of the soils
encountered in the field were placed in sample jars and are now stored in our laboratory for further
analysis if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, all samples will be disposed of after two (2)
months.
Soil Conditions
The soil borings typically encountered medium stiff to hard cohesive soils from beneath the
topsoil to the termination depths of the borings.
Borings B-1, B-2 and B-3 encountered granular soils at depths of three (3), fourteen and
one-half (14½) and nineteen and one-half (19½) feet, respectively. Many of the other borings
encountered thin sand seams within the cohesive soils.
Detailed soil descriptions at each boring location have been included on the Records of
Subsurface Exploration in the Appendix.
According to the Soil Survey of Hamilton County, Indiana published by the United States
Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service, the majority of the soils covering this site
are classified as Brookston Silty Clay Loam (Br), Crosby silt loam (CrA), and Miami silt loam
(MmB2) soils. The Custom Soil Resource Report for Hamilton County, Indiana has been
included in the Appendix.
Seismic Consideration
Based on information obtained in our subsurface investigation and from information
obtained from the Indiana GIS, the site may be classified with a Site Class C in accordance with the
2006 International Building Code guidelines. Spectral response values of 0.178 and 0.079 for SS
and S1, respectively, may also be utilized.
8
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Groundwater
Groundwater levels taken during and upon completion of the boring operations generally
indicated groundwater levels ranging in depth from five (5) feet to below the termination depth of
the borings. The exact location of the water table may fluctuate somewhat depending upon normal
seasonal variations in precipitation and surface runoff. It should be noted that the drilling operations
were conducted during a dry period.
The Soil Survey of Hamilton County, Indiana indicates a seasonal high groundwater table
ranging from the ground surface to greater than six (6) feet below the ground surface during the
wetter portions of the year is possible at much of this site. Again, it should be noted that the
groundwater level measurements recorded on the individual Records of Subsurface Exploration
included in the appendix of this report, are accurate only for the dates on which the measurements
were performed. The exact location of the water table should be anticipated to fluctuate somewhat
depending upon normal seasonal variations in precipitation and surface runoff.
9
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION & RECOMMENDATIONS
Project Description
It is anticipated that the structure will consist of a two (2) to three (3)-story wood
framed building, constructed as a slab-on-grade. Maximum column and wall loads of 80 kips and
3500 pounds per linear foot, respectively, are anticipated. The finished floor elevation is anticipated
to be 865.7.
Paved parking and drive areas are to be constructed as well. The location of the soil borings
in relation to the size and preliminary configuration of the building is shown on the enclosed Boring
Location Plan.
Utility Conflicts
Plans indicate that a gas pipeline once ran through the southern portion of the site in the
footprint of the proposed structure. We understand that this pipeline has been relocated, however
it is unknown whether the former pipe was removed or if it is still in place. It is important that
all underground utility conduits and sewers either be removed and backfilled with structural fills
or that all foundation loads extend below the bottom of the former utility trench. At no time
should footings or floor slab be placed directly above existing utilities. Utility trenches are
typically backfilled using a limited amount of compactive effort. Therefore, any foundation loads
place above existing utility trenches may cause considerable settlement.
Geotechnical Recommendations
Considering the encountered soil conditions at the boring locations, the anticipated loads of
the structure, and the relative economics of the available foundation types, conventional spread and
continuous wall footings founded at a shallow depth appear to represent a feasible foundation
solution for this project. In general, the soil conditions at this site are well suited for support of
shallow foundations, slabs, and pavements. Net allowable bearing pressures of 3,000 and 2,400
psf are recommended for dimensioning spread footings and continuous wall footings, respectively.
In utilizing the above-mentioned net allowable pressures for dimensioning footings, it is
necessary to consider only those loads applied above the finished floor elevation. It is
recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. inspect all foundation
excavations prior to the placement of concrete.
10
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Using the above mentioned bearing pressures and recommendations, total settlements of less
than one (1) inch and differential settlements of one half (½) inch or less can be anticipated.
In order to alleviate the effects of seasonal variations in moisture content on the behavior
of the footings and eliminate the effects of frost action, all foundations should be founded a
minimum of three (3) feet below the final grade.
Floor Slab Recommendations
It is typically desirable to place floor slab as a slab-on-grade supported by the existing
soils. In the areas where the existing grade is above the final floor elevation, the building area
should be undercut and a granular material placed beneath the slab. In those areas where the
existing grade is below the final floor elevation, a well-compacted structural fill will be
necessary to raise the site to the desired grade. All fill materials may consist of onsite materials
with the exception of topsoil or other approved borrow materials if proper moisture content and
compaction procedures are maintained.
Prior to elevating the site, the existing subgrade soils must be proofrolled with approved
equipment. It is recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. be present
to determine the exact depth of undercutting and to monitor backfilling operations.
After the building area has been raised to the proper elevation, a granular fill should be
placed immediately beneath all floor slabs.
In order to properly support the footings and floor slab, it will be necessary that
controlled fill material be placed throughout the entire footprint of the building and beyond the
footprint. The horizontal distance that this controlled compaction is necessary will depend on
the depth of the fill material. In cut areas is it recommended that pad construction be performed
a minimum of five (5) feet outside the building. In fill areas it is recommended that compacted
fills be placed a minimum of five (5) feet plus one half of the height of the fill outside the
building line (5+h/2).
It is recommended that the materials within the slab subgrade area be compacted to a
minimum density of 95 percent of the material’s maximum density in accordance with ASTM
D1557 (Modified Proctor), since areas of thickened slab are anticipated to support structural
loads.
11
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Pavement Recommendations
The strength of the subgrade soils at this site will depend upon several variables including
drainage and compaction. Due to the cohesive nature of the soils encountered at this site, it is
extremely important that all paved areas be designed to prevent water from collecting or ponding
immediately beneath the pavement. This can be accomplished by sheet draining the parking area
and sloping the subgrade soils and outletting them to a drain or a ditch to allow for subgrade
drainage, or by the installation of a subsurface drainage system.
For these soils to provide adequate support for pavement, it will also be necessary that the
earthmoving contractor follow proper site work techniques. The exposed subgrade should be
proof-rolled with equipment approved by a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. This
proof-rolling will assist in identifying pockets of soft unstable materials beneath exposed
subgrades.
In areas where fill will be required to raise the site to proposed grade, the performance of
the pavements will be greatly affected by the quality of compaction achieved in the subgrade
soils. Thus, it is recommended that all pavement areas be compacted to 93 percent of the
material’s maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. On-site soil, with the
exception of topsoil, may be used for fill provided it is free of any organics or debris.
Some modifications to the recommendations provided in this report may be necessary
once final design plans are established. The modifications may influence the overall cost of the
project and construction sequence. If complications become apparent to the design team or
owner, this information should be provided to Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. at the earliest
possible date.
Proposed Retention Pond
Plans indicate that a retention pond is to be constructed in conjunction with this project.
Present plans indicate that this pond will be located in the eastern portion of the site. The results
of our field investigation (boring B-7) indicated that clay with varying amounts of sand and
gravel is the predominate soil type in this area. The results of our evaluations indicate that these
soils have moderate to high silt and clay contents with some sand and a trace of gravel.
12
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
It is anticipated that pond excavations will be constructed within the underlying silty clay
soils. However, if sand seams are exposed on the slope or bottom of the excavation, this
retention facility will not function as a sealed system. Without a liner covering the sideslopes,
the water elevation within the pond will fluctuate with a rise and fall of the natural groundwater
level.
If isolated pockets of sand or sandy silts are encountered during excavation operations, then
a liner or covering will be necessary to maintain the sealed pond system. Various types of liners are
available including a clay-bentonite sealer, natural clay liners, and various synthetic liners to create
a sealed retention pond system. It appears that the most economically feasible liners could be either
a natural clay or bentonite liner. If the natural clay soils are properly moisture-conditioned and
compacted the pond should act as a sealed system provided all sand seams are covered. These clay
soils should cover the entire pond bottom and side slopes with a thickness of twelve (12) to eighteen
(18) inches. The clay soils, if in place, should be reworked so that a density of at least 93% of
maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D1557 is achieved. The material should be
compacted with a moisture content of approximately 2% over the optimum moisture content for the
soils as determined by ASTM D1557.
13
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
Site Preparation
Excessively organic topsoil and loose dumped fill materials will generally undergo high
volume changes that are detrimental to the behavior of pavements, floor slabs, structural fills, and
foundations placed upon them. It is recommended that all topsoil and/or loose materials be stripped
from the construction areas and wasted or stockpiled for later use.
The borings typically encountered four (4) to seven (7) inches of topsoil at this site. It is
recommended that this material be stripped from the site prior to construction. Deeper stripping
may be required to completely remove the root ball of large trees. The depth and consistency of
these materials will vary across the site. Borings do not indicate variations in the thickness of this
layer between selected locations.
After the site has been stripped, it is recommended that the exposed subgrade be proof-
rolled with approved equipment. This proof-rolling will determine where pockets of soft unsuitable
materials are encountered. It is recommended that a representative of Alt & Witzig Engineering,
Inc. be present for this phase of this project.
After the existing subgrade soils are excavated to design grade and passed inspection, proper
control of subgrade compaction and fill, and structural fill replacement should be maintained in
accordance with the Recommended Specifications for Compacted Fills and Backfills, presented in
the Appendix of this report; thus minimizing volume changes and differential settlements which are
detrimental to behavior of shallow foundations, floor slabs and pavements.
Pipeline Area
No information regarding the pipeline backfill was available at the time of this report. Thus,
it is not known if soft or loose backfill materials are present in and around the pipeline area. It will
likely be necessary to undercut and replace the soil conditions in the pipeline easement to properly
construct foundations, slabs, and pavements in this area. The pipeline company should be notified
of the intent to improve the site in the area of the easement and should also be consulted regarding
backfilling procedures, and future construction procedures.
14
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
Groundwater
Groundwater levels taken during and upon completion of the boring operations generally
indicated groundwater levels ranging in depth from five (5) feet to below the termination depth of
the borings. However, Soil Conservation Service data indicates the potential for a perched
groundwater table to be present across much of the site during the wet portion of the year. The
exact location of the water table will fluctuate depending upon normal seasonal variations in
precipitation and surface runoff.
Depending upon the time of the year and the weather conditions when the excavations are
made, seepage from a perched groundwater table or surface runoff may occur into shallow
excavations or soften the subgrade soils. Since these soils tend to soften when exposed to free
water, every effort should be made to keep the excavations dry should water be encountered. Sump
pumps or other conventional dewatering procedures should be sufficient for this purpose. It is also
recommended that all concrete for footings be placed the same day as the excavation is made.
15
Alt & Witzig File: 13IN0473
SUMMARY
A subsurface exploration and engineering evaluation of the subsurface soil conditions has
been conducted for the Spectrum Retirement Community in Carmel, Indiana.
Provided significant cuts and fills are not necessary to achieve final grade and the backfill
surrounding the pipeline are properly treated, the exploration and analysis reported herein is
considered in sufficient detail and scope to form a reasonable basis for final design. The
recommendations submitted are based on the available soil information and assumed design details
enumerated in this report. If actual design details differ from those specified in this report, this
information should be brought to the attention of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. so that it may be
determined if changes in the foundation recommendations are required. If deviations from the noted
subsurface conditions are encountered during construction, they should also be brought to the
attention of Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
APPENDIX
RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMPACTED FILLS AND BACKFILLS
All fill shall be formed from material free of vegetable matter, rubbish, large rock, and other
deleterious material. Prior to placement of fill, a sample of the proposed fill material should be
submitted to Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. for his approval. The surface of each layer will be
approximately horizontal but will be provided with sufficient longitudinal and transverse slope to
provide for runoff of surface water from every point. The fill material should be placed in layers
not to exceed eight (8) inches in loose thickness and should be sprinkled with water as required to
secure specified compactions. Each layer should be uniformly compacted by means of suitable
equipment of the type required by the materials composing the fill. Under no circumstances should
a bulldozer or similar tracked vehicles be used as compacting equipment. Material containing an
excess of water so the specified compaction limits cannot be attained should be spread and dried to
a moisture content that will permit proper compaction. All fill should be compacted to the specified
percent of the maximum density obtained in accordance with ASTM D1557 (95 percent of
maximum dry density below the base of footing and floor slab elevation, 93 percent of maximum
dry density beneath pavements). Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate that the
specified compaction limits are not obtained; the areas represented by such tests should be reworked
and retested as required until the specified limits are reached.
Excavation Details in Unstable Material
Project Name:
Spectrum Retirement Community
Prepared By:
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
Prepared For:
Spectrum Retirement Communities, LLC.
Project No:
13IN0473
Date:
9-2013
Site Location
SITE LOCATION MAP
Project Name:
Spectrum Retirement Community
Prepared By:
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
Prepared For:
Spectrum Retirement Communities
Project No:
13IN0473
Date:
9/13
N
4.5
1.5
2.5
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown and Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray, Wet Poorly Graded SAND with Gravel
Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
End of Boring at 21 feet
2 Attempts, No
Recovery
1.0' Heave
0.5
7.0
14.5
20.0
21.0
18
6
10
33
19
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
20
11.0 ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-1
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
8.5 ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984901 Longitude -86.984901
HSA
Caved At Completion 8.5 ft.
12.1
10.5
8.9
1.5
3.0
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown Sandy CLAY
Brown, Moist Poorly Graded SAND with Clay
Brown Sandy CLAY with Sand Seams
Gray Sandy CLAY
Gray, Wet Poorly Graded SAND with Gravel
End of Boring at 16 feet
Odor Noted
0.3
3.0
4.5
7.0
14.5
16.0
5
13
10
10
15
1
2
3
4
5
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
14.5 ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-2
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
5.0 ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984554 Longitude -86.148784
HSA
Caved At Completion 11.0 ft.
11.7
10.4
8.7
11.0
2.0
3.8
4.0
2.0
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray Sandy CLAY
Gray, Wet Poorly Graded SAND with Gravel
End of Boring at 21 feet
0.6
9.5
19.5
21.0
6
5
16
14
15
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
20
19.5 ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-3
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
15.0 ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984064 Longitude -86.148542
HSA
Caved At Completion 15.0 ft.
4.5
3.3
2.3
4.3
4.3
4.5
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
End of Boring at 21 feet
0.4
10.0
21.0
14
8
7
14
10
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
20
Dry ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-4
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
Dry ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984872 Longitude -86.147987
HSA
Caved At Completion 14.5 ft.
4.5
3.0
3.3
4.5
4.5
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown Sandy CLAY
Brown and Gray Sandy CLAY
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
End of Boring at 16 feet
0.4
5.0
7.0
10.0
16.0
15
11
8
19
13
1
2
3
4
5
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
Dry ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-5
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
Dry ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984447 Longitude -86.147792
HSA
Caved At Completion 12.0 ft.
9.9
11.5
11.3
10.2
10.0
10.1
3.0
4.0
2.5
4.5
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Gray to Brown Sandy CLAY
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
Gray Sandy CLAY
End of Boring at 21 feet
2 Attempts, No
Recovery
0.3
4.5
14.5
19.5
21.0
17
10
9
19
18
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
20
Dry ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-6
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
Dry ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984083 Longitude -86.147679
HSA
Caved At Completion 14.0 ft.
10.8
6.8
9.5
9.8
11.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.3
Dark Brown Clayey SILT
(Topsoil)
Brown Sandy CLAY
Gray Silty CLAY with Sand
End of Boring at 21 feet
Driving on a Rock
0.5
10.0
21.0
16
20
15
15
22
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
CFA
Sa
m
p
l
e
r
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Re
c
o
v
e
r
y
G
r
a
p
h
i
c
s
Gr
o
u
n
d
W
a
t
e
r
Spectrum Retirement Communities
ALT & WITZIG FILE #
Mo
i
s
t
u
r
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
%
Dr
y
U
n
i
t
W
e
i
g
h
t
(
p
c
f
)
PROJECT LOCATION
During Drilling
TEST DATA
Driller S. Gray CME 55 ATVRig Type
Qu
-
t
s
f
U
n
c
o
n
f
i
n
e
d
Co
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
v
e
S
t
r
e
n
g
t
h
Po
c
k
e
t
P
e
n
e
t
r
o
m
e
t
e
r
Groundwater Boring Method
- Pressed Shelby Tube
Sc
a
l
e
ST
CA
RC
CU
CT
St
a
n
d
a
r
d
P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
CLIENT
- Driven Split Spoon
5
10
15
20
Dry ft.
DC
MD
Page of1 1
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
8/13/13
30
2
B-7
13IN0473
- Hollow Stem Augers
in.
STRATA
ELEV.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sample Type
PROJECT NAME
St
r
a
t
a
Sa
m
p
l
e
No
.
in.
- Continuous Flight Augers
- Driving Casing
- Continuous Tube
SURFACE ELEVATION
140
BORING #
Te
s
t
,
N
-
b
l
o
w
s
/
f
o
o
t
RECORD OF SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
DRILLING and SAMPLING INFORMATION
Date Started
PP
-
t
s
f
- Continuous Flight Auger
Re
m
a
r
k
s
Carmel, Indiana
8/13/13
HSA
De
p
t
h
De
p
t
h
SS
Date Completed
Boring Method
Hammer Wt.lbs.
Hammer Drop
Spoon Sampler OD
- Rock Core
- Cuttings
- Mud Drilling
At Completion
Sa
m
p
l
e
T
y
p
e
Dry ft.
Spectrum Retirement Community
Latitude 39.984753 Longitude -86.147218
HSA
Caved At Completion 13.0 ft.
Project: Spectrum Retirement Community
Location: Carmel, Indiana
Number: 13IN0473
MAT ERIAL GRAPHICS LEGEND
GENERAL NOTES
Apparent water level noted while drilling.
CL-ML: USCS Low Plasticity Silty
Clay
CLS: USCS Low Plasticity Sandy
Clay SP: USCS Poorly-graded Sand
SP-SC: USCS Poorly-graded
Sand with Clay TOPSOIL
Apparent water level noted upon completion.
Apparent water level noted upon delayed time.
SS: Split Spoon
SOIL PROPERTY SYMBOLS
Standard "N" penetration value. Blows per foot of a 140-lb hammer falling 30" on a 2" O.D. split-spoon.N:
PP:Pocket Penetrometer, tsf
LL:
Qu:Unconfined Compressive Strength, tsf
Plastic Limit, %PL:Liquid Limit, %PI:Plasticity Index, %
DRILLING AND SAMPLING SYMBOLS
SAMPLER SYMBOLS
RELATIVE DENSITY & CONSISTANCY CLASSIFICATION
(NON-COHESIVE SOILS)
TERM BLOWS PER FOOT
Very Loose
Loose
Medium Dense
Dense
Very Dense
0 - 5
6 - 10
11 - 30
31 - 50
>51
RELATIVE DENSITY & CONSISTANCY CLASSIFICATION
(COHESIVE SOILS)
TERM BLOWS PER FOOT
Very Soft
Soft
Medium Stiff
Stiff
Very Stiff
Hard
0 - 3
4 - 5
6 - 10
11 - 15
16 - 30
>31
GROUNDWATER SYMBOLS
GE
N
E
R
A
L
N
O
T
E
S
-
P
R
O
J
E
C
T
S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
1
3
I
N
0
4
7
3
G
I
N
T
.
G
P
J
U
S
E
V
A
L
.
G
D
T
9
/
1
8
/
1
3
Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc.
4105 West 99th St.
Carmel, IN 46032
Telephone: 317-875-7000
Fax: 317-876-3705
United States
Department of
Agriculture
A product of the National
Cooperative Soil Survey,
a joint effort of the United
States Department of
Agriculture and other
Federal agencies, State
agencies including the
Agricultural Experiment
Stations, and local
participants
Custom Soil Resource
Report for
Hamilton
County, Indiana
A&W FIle: 13IN0473
Natural
Resources
Conservation
Service
September 9, 2013
Preface
Soil surveys contain information that affects land use planning in survey areas. They
highlight soil limitations that affect various land uses and provide information about
the properties of the soils in the survey areas. Soil surveys are designed for many
different users, including farmers, ranchers, foresters, agronomists, urban planners,
community officials, engineers, developers, builders, and home buyers. Also,
conservationists, teachers, students, and specialists in recreation, waste disposal,
and pollution control can use the surveys to help them understand, protect, or enhance
the environment.
Various land use regulations of Federal, State, and local governments may impose
special restrictions on land use or land treatment. Soil surveys identify soil properties
that are used in making various land use or land treatment decisions. The information
is intended to help the land users identify and reduce the effects of soil limitations on
various land uses. The landowner or user is responsible for identifying and complying
with existing laws and regulations.
Although soil survey information can be used for general farm, local, and wider area
planning, onsite investigation is needed to supplement this information in some cases.
Examples include soil quality assessments (http://soils.usda.gov/sqi/) and certain
conservation and engineering applications. For more detailed information, contact
your local USDA Service Center (http://offices.sc.egov.usda.gov/locator/app?
agency=nrcs) or your NRCS State Soil Scientist (http://soils.usda.gov/contact/
state_offices/).
Great differences in soil properties can occur within short distances. Some soils are
seasonally wet or subject to flooding. Some are too unstable to be used as a
foundation for buildings or roads. Clayey or wet soils are poorly suited to use as septic
tank absorption fields. A high water table makes a soil poorly suited to basements or
underground installations.
The National Cooperative Soil Survey is a joint effort of the United States Department
of Agriculture and other Federal agencies, State agencies including the Agricultural
Experiment Stations, and local agencies. The Natural Resources Conservation
Service (NRCS) has leadership for the Federal part of the National Cooperative Soil
Survey.
Information about soils is updated periodically. Updated information is available
through the NRCS Soil Data Mart Web site or the NRCS Web Soil Survey. The Soil
Data Mart is the data storage site for the official soil survey information.
The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) prohibits discrimination in all its programs
and activities on the basis of race, color, national origin, age, disability, and where
applicable, sex, marital status, familial status, parental status, religion, sexual
orientation, genetic information, political beliefs, reprisal, or because all or a part of an
individual's income is derived from any public assistance program. (Not all prohibited
bases apply to all programs.) Persons with disabilities who require alternative means
2
for communication of program information (Braille, large print, audiotape, etc.) should
contact USDA's TARGET Center at (202) 720-2600 (voice and TDD). To file a
complaint of discrimination, write to USDA, Director, Office of Civil Rights, 1400
Independence Avenue, S.W., Washington, D.C. 20250-9410 or call (800) 795-3272
(voice) or (202) 720-6382 (TDD). USDA is an equal opportunity provider and
employer.
3
Contents
Preface....................................................................................................................2
How Soil Surveys Are Made..................................................................................5
Soil Map..................................................................................................................7
Soil Map................................................................................................................8
Legend..................................................................................................................9
Map Unit Legend................................................................................................10
Map Unit Descriptions........................................................................................10
Hamilton County, Indiana................................................................................12
Br—Brookston silty clay loam......................................................................12
CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent slopes..............................................12
MmB2—Miami silt loam, 2 to 6 percent slopes, eroded..............................13
MoC3—Miami clay loam, 6 to 12 percent slopes, severely eroded............14
Soil Information for All Uses...............................................................................16
Soil Reports........................................................................................................16
Building Site Development..............................................................................16
Dwellings and Small Commercial Buildings (A&W File: 13IN0473)....16
Soil Physical Properties..................................................................................19
Engineering Properties (A&W File: 13IN0473)....................................19
Water Features...............................................................................................23
Water Features (A&W File: 13IN0473)................................................23
References............................................................................................................27
4
How Soil Surveys Are Made
Soil surveys are made to provide information about the soils and miscellaneous areas
in a specific area. They include a description of the soils and miscellaneous areas and
their location on the landscape and tables that show soil properties and limitations
affecting various uses. Soil scientists observed the steepness, length, and shape of
the slopes; the general pattern of drainage; the kinds of crops and native plants; and
the kinds of bedrock. They observed and described many soil profiles. A soil profile is
the sequence of natural layers, or horizons, in a soil. The profile extends from the
surface down into the unconsolidated material in which the soil formed or from the
surface down to bedrock. The unconsolidated material is devoid of roots and other
living organisms and has not been changed by other biological activity.
Currently, soils are mapped according to the boundaries of major land resource areas
(MLRAs). MLRAs are geographically associated land resource units that share
common characteristics related to physiography, geology, climate, water resources,
soils, biological resources, and land uses (USDA, 2006). Soil survey areas typically
consist of parts of one or more MLRA.
The soils and miscellaneous areas in a survey area occur in an orderly pattern that is
related to the geology, landforms, relief, climate, and natural vegetation of the area.
Each kind of soil and miscellaneous area is associated with a particular kind of
landform or with a segment of the landform. By observing the soils and miscellaneous
areas in the survey area and relating their position to specific segments of the
landform, a soil scientist develops a concept, or model, of how they were formed. Thus,
during mapping, this model enables the soil scientist to predict with a considerable
degree of accuracy the kind of soil or miscellaneous area at a specific location on the
landscape.
Commonly, individual soils on the landscape merge into one another as their
characteristics gradually change. To construct an accurate soil map, however, soil
scientists must determine the boundaries between the soils. They can observe only
a limited number of soil profiles. Nevertheless, these observations, supplemented by
an understanding of the soil-vegetation-landscape relationship, are sufficient to verify
predictions of the kinds of soil in an area and to determine the boundaries.
Soil scientists recorded the characteristics of the soil profiles that they studied. They
noted soil color, texture, size and shape of soil aggregates, kind and amount of rock
fragments, distribution of plant roots, reaction, and other features that enable them to
identify soils. After describing the soils in the survey area and determining their
properties, the soil scientists assigned the soils to taxonomic classes (units).
Taxonomic classes are concepts. Each taxonomic class has a set of soil
characteristics with precisely defined limits. The classes are used as a basis for
comparison to classify soils systematically. Soil taxonomy, the system of taxonomic
classification used in the United States, is based mainly on the kind and character of
soil properties and the arrangement of horizons within the profile. After the soil
scientists classified and named the soils in the survey area, they compared the
5
individual soils with similar soils in the same taxonomic class in other areas so that
they could confirm data and assemble additional data based on experience and
research.
The objective of soil mapping is not to delineate pure map unit components; the
objective is to separate the landscape into landforms or landform segments that have
similar use and management requirements. Each map unit is defined by a unique
combination of soil components and/or miscellaneous areas in predictable
proportions. Some components may be highly contrasting to the other components of
the map unit. The presence of minor components in a map unit in no way diminishes
the usefulness or accuracy of the data. The delineation of such landforms and
landform segments on the map provides sufficient information for the development of
resource plans. If intensive use of small areas is planned, onsite investigation is
needed to define and locate the soils and miscellaneous areas.
Soil scientists make many field observations in the process of producing a soil map.
The frequency of observation is dependent upon several factors, including scale of
mapping, intensity of mapping, design of map units, complexity of the landscape, and
experience of the soil scientist. Observations are made to test and refine the soil-
landscape model and predictions and to verify the classification of the soils at specific
locations. Once the soil-landscape model is refined, a significantly smaller number of
measurements of individual soil properties are made and recorded. These
measurements may include field measurements, such as those for color, depth to
bedrock, and texture, and laboratory measurements, such as those for content of
sand, silt, clay, salt, and other components. Properties of each soil typically vary from
one point to another across the landscape.
Observations for map unit components are aggregated to develop ranges of
characteristics for the components. The aggregated values are presented. Direct
measurements do not exist for every property presented for every map unit
component. Values for some properties are estimated from combinations of other
properties.
While a soil survey is in progress, samples of some of the soils in the area generally
are collected for laboratory analyses and for engineering tests. Soil scientists interpret
the data from these analyses and tests as well as the field-observed characteristics
and the soil properties to determine the expected behavior of the soils under different
uses. Interpretations for all of the soils are field tested through observation of the soils
in different uses and under different levels of management. Some interpretations are
modified to fit local conditions, and some new interpretations are developed to meet
local needs. Data are assembled from other sources, such as research information,
production records, and field experience of specialists. For example, data on crop
yields under defined levels of management are assembled from farm records and from
field or plot experiments on the same kinds of soil.
Predictions about soil behavior are based not only on soil properties but also on such
variables as climate and biological activity. Soil conditions are predictable over long
periods of time, but they are not predictable from year to year. For example, soil
scientists can predict with a fairly high degree of accuracy that a given soil will have
a high water table within certain depths in most years, but they cannot predict that a
high water table will always be at a specific level in the soil on a specific date.
After soil scientists located and identified the significant natural bodies of soil in the
survey area, they drew the boundaries of these bodies on aerial photographs and
identified each as a specific map unit. Aerial photographs show trees, buildings, fields,
roads, and rivers, all of which help in locating boundaries accurately.
Custom Soil Resource Report
6
Soil Map
The soil map section includes the soil map for the defined area of interest, a list of soil
map units on the map and extent of each map unit, and cartographic symbols
displayed on the map. Also presented are various metadata about data used to
produce the map, and a description of each soil map unit.
7
8
Custom Soil Resource Report
Soil Map
44
2
6
2
8
0
44
2
6
3
1
0
44
2
6
3
4
0
44
2
6
3
7
0
44
2
6
4
0
0
44
2
6
4
3
0
44
2
6
4
6
0
44
2
6
2
8
0
44
2
6
3
1
0
44
2
6
3
4
0
44
2
6
3
7
0
44
2
6
4
0
0
44
2
6
4
3
0
44
2
6
4
6
0
572610 572640 572670 572700 572730 572760 572790 572820 572850 572880 572910
572610 572640 572670 572700 572730 572760 572790 572820 572850 572880 572910
39° 59' 7'' N
86
°
8
'
5
8
'
'
W
39° 59' 7'' N
86
°
8
'
4
5
'
'
W
39° 59' 0'' N
86
°
8
'
5
8
'
'
W
39° 59' 0'' N
86
°
8
'
4
5
'
'
W
N
Map projection: Web Mercator Corner coordinates: WGS84 Edge tics: UTM Zone 16N WGS84
050100200300
Feet
0204080120Meters
Map Scale: 1:1,430 if printed on A landscape (11" x 8.5") sheet.
MAP LEGEND MAP INFORMATION
Area of Interest (AOI)
Area of Interest (AOI)
Soils
Soil Map Unit Polygons
Soil Map Unit Lines
Soil Map Unit Points
Special Point Features
Blowout
Borrow Pit
Clay Spot
Closed Depression
Gravel Pit
Gravelly Spot
Landfill
Lava Flow
Marsh or swamp
Mine or Quarry
Miscellaneous Water
Perennial Water
Rock Outcrop
Saline Spot
Sandy Spot
Severely Eroded Spot
Sinkhole
Slide or Slip
Sodic Spot
Spoil Area
Stony Spot
Very Stony Spot
Wet Spot
Other
Special Line Features
Water Features
Streams and Canals
Transportation
Rails
Interstate Highways
US Routes
Major Roads
Local Roads
Background
Aerial Photography
The soil surveys that comprise your AOI were mapped at 1:15,800.
Warning: Soil Map may not be valid at this scale.
Enlargement of maps beyond the scale of mapping can cause
misunderstanding of the detail of mapping and accuracy of soil line
placement. The maps do not show the small areas of contrasting
soils that could have been shown at a more detailed scale.
Please rely on the bar scale on each map sheet for map
measurements.
Source of Map: Natural Resources Conservation Service
Web Soil Survey URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov
Coordinate System: Web Mercator (EPSG:3857)
Maps from the Web Soil Survey are based on the Web Mercator
projection, which preserves direction and shape but distorts
distance and area. A projection that preserves area, such as the
Albers equal-area conic projection, should be used if more accurate
calculations of distance or area are required.
This product is generated from the USDA-NRCS certified data as of
the version date(s) listed below.
Soil Survey Area: Hamilton County, Indiana
Survey Area Data: Version 13, Sep 25, 2012
Soil map units are labeled (as space allows) for map scales 1:50,000
or larger.
Date(s) aerial images were photographed: Sep 17, 2011—Mar
28, 2012
The orthophoto or other base map on which the soil lines were
compiled and digitized probably differs from the background
imagery displayed on these maps. As a result, some minor shifting
of map unit boundaries may be evident.
Custom Soil Resource Report
9
Map Unit Legend
Hamilton County, Indiana (IN057)
Map Unit Symbol Map Unit Name Acres in AOI Percent of AOI
Br Brookston silty clay loam 3.9 37.9%
CrA Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent
slopes
2.7 26.0%
MmB2 Miami silt loam, 2 to 6 percent
slopes, eroded
3.5 34.3%
MoC3 Miami clay loam, 6 to 12 percent
slopes, severely eroded
0.2 1.8%
Totals for Area of Interest 10.4 100.0%
Map Unit Descriptions
The map units delineated on the detailed soil maps in a soil survey represent the soils
or miscellaneous areas in the survey area. The map unit descriptions, along with the
maps, can be used to determine the composition and properties of a unit.
A map unit delineation on a soil map represents an area dominated by one or more
major kinds of soil or miscellaneous areas. A map unit is identified and named
according to the taxonomic classification of the dominant soils. Within a taxonomic
class there are precisely defined limits for the properties of the soils. On the landscape,
however, the soils are natural phenomena, and they have the characteristic variability
of all natural phenomena. Thus, the range of some observed properties may extend
beyond the limits defined for a taxonomic class. Areas of soils of a single taxonomic
class rarely, if ever, can be mapped without including areas of other taxonomic
classes. Consequently, every map unit is made up of the soils or miscellaneous areas
for which it is named and some minor components that belong to taxonomic classes
other than those of the major soils.
Most minor soils have properties similar to those of the dominant soil or soils in the
map unit, and thus they do not affect use and management. These are called
noncontrasting, or similar, components. They may or may not be mentioned in a
particular map unit description. Other minor components, however, have properties
and behavioral characteristics divergent enough to affect use or to require different
management. These are called contrasting, or dissimilar, components. They generally
are in small areas and could not be mapped separately because of the scale used.
Some small areas of strongly contrasting soils or miscellaneous areas are identified
by a special symbol on the maps. If included in the database for a given area, the
contrasting minor components are identified in the map unit descriptions along with
some characteristics of each. A few areas of minor components may not have been
observed, and consequently they are not mentioned in the descriptions, especially
where the pattern was so complex that it was impractical to make enough observations
to identify all the soils and miscellaneous areas on the landscape.
The presence of minor components in a map unit in no way diminishes the usefulness
or accuracy of the data. The objective of mapping is not to delineate pure taxonomic
classes but rather to separate the landscape into landforms or landform segments that
Custom Soil Resource Report
10
have similar use and management requirements. The delineation of such segments
on the map provides sufficient information for the development of resource plans. If
intensive use of small areas is planned, however, onsite investigation is needed to
define and locate the soils and miscellaneous areas.
An identifying symbol precedes the map unit name in the map unit descriptions. Each
description includes general facts about the unit and gives important soil properties
and qualities.
Soils that have profiles that are almost alike make up a soil series. Except for
differences in texture of the surface layer, all the soils of a series have major horizons
that are similar in composition, thickness, and arrangement.
Soils of one series can differ in texture of the surface layer, slope, stoniness, salinity,
degree of erosion, and other characteristics that affect their use. On the basis of such
differences, a soil series is divided into soil phases. Most of the areas shown on the
detailed soil maps are phases of soil series. The name of a soil phase commonly
indicates a feature that affects use or management. For example, Alpha silt loam, 0
to 2 percent slopes, is a phase of the Alpha series.
Some map units are made up of two or more major soils or miscellaneous areas.
These map units are complexes, associations, or undifferentiated groups.
A complex consists of two or more soils or miscellaneous areas in such an intricate
pattern or in such small areas that they cannot be shown separately on the maps. The
pattern and proportion of the soils or miscellaneous areas are somewhat similar in all
areas. Alpha-Beta complex, 0 to 6 percent slopes, is an example.
An association is made up of two or more geographically associated soils or
miscellaneous areas that are shown as one unit on the maps. Because of present or
anticipated uses of the map units in the survey area, it was not considered practical
or necessary to map the soils or miscellaneous areas separately. The pattern and
relative proportion of the soils or miscellaneous areas are somewhat similar. Alpha-
Beta association, 0 to 2 percent slopes, is an example.
An undifferentiated group is made up of two or more soils or miscellaneous areas that
could be mapped individually but are mapped as one unit because similar
interpretations can be made for use and management. The pattern and proportion of
the soils or miscellaneous areas in a mapped area are not uniform. An area can be
made up of only one of the major soils or miscellaneous areas, or it can be made up
of all of them. Alpha and Beta soils, 0 to 2 percent slopes, is an example.
Some surveys include miscellaneous areas. Such areas have little or no soil material
and support little or no vegetation. Rock outcrop is an example.
Custom Soil Resource Report
11
Hamilton County, Indiana
Br—Brookston silty clay loam
Map Unit Setting
Elevation:720 to 980 feet
Mean annual precipitation:36 to 42 inches
Mean annual air temperature:49 to 52 degrees F
Frost-free period:175 to 185 days
Map Unit Composition
Brookston and similar soils:100 percent
Description of Brookston
Setting
Landform:Depressions on till plains
Landform position (two-dimensional):Footslope
Down-slope shape:Concave
Across-slope shape:Linear
Parent material:Loamy till
Properties and qualities
Slope:0 to 2 percent
Depth to restrictive feature:More than 80 inches
Drainage class:Poorly drained
Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Moderately high (0.20 to
0.60 in/hr)
Depth to water table:About 0 to 12 inches
Frequency of flooding:None
Frequency of ponding:None
Calcium carbonate, maximum content:40 percent
Available water capacity:High (about 10.0 inches)
Interpretive groups
Farmland classification:Prime farmland if drained
Land capability (nonirrigated):2w
Hydrologic Soil Group:B/D
Other vegetative classification:Mixed/Transitional (Mixed Native Vegetation)
Typical profile
0 to 11 inches:Silty clay loam
11 to 58 inches:Clay loam
58 to 70 inches:Loam
CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3 percent slopes
Map Unit Setting
Elevation:720 to 980 feet
Mean annual precipitation:36 to 42 inches
Mean annual air temperature:49 to 52 degrees F
Custom Soil Resource Report
12
Frost-free period:175 to 185 days
Map Unit Composition
Crosby and similar soils:90 percent
Description of Crosby
Setting
Landform:Till plains
Landform position (two-dimensional):Backslope, shoulder, summit
Landform position (three-dimensional):Side slope
Down-slope shape:Convex
Across-slope shape:Linear
Parent material:Loess over loamy till
Properties and qualities
Slope:0 to 3 percent
Depth to restrictive feature:20 to 40 inches to densic material
Drainage class:Somewhat poorly drained
Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Low to moderately high
(0.01 to 0.20 in/hr)
Depth to water table:About 6 to 24 inches
Frequency of flooding:None
Frequency of ponding:None
Calcium carbonate, maximum content:40 percent
Available water capacity:Low (about 5.4 inches)
Interpretive groups
Farmland classification:Prime farmland if drained
Land capability (nonirrigated):2w
Hydrologic Soil Group:C/D
Other vegetative classification:Trees/Timber (Woody Vegetation)
Typical profile
0 to 11 inches:Silt loam
11 to 27 inches:Clay loam
27 to 32 inches:Loam
32 to 60 inches:Loam
MmB2—Miami silt loam, 2 to 6 percent slopes, eroded
Map Unit Setting
Elevation:720 to 980 feet
Mean annual precipitation:36 to 42 inches
Mean annual air temperature:49 to 52 degrees F
Frost-free period:175 to 185 days
Map Unit Composition
Miami and similar soils:100 percent
Custom Soil Resource Report
13
Description of Miami
Setting
Landform:Till plains
Landform position (two-dimensional):Summit
Landform position (three-dimensional):Interfluve
Down-slope shape:Convex
Across-slope shape:Linear
Parent material:Loess over loamy till
Properties and qualities
Slope:2 to 6 percent
Depth to restrictive feature:24 to 40 inches to densic material
Drainage class:Moderately well drained
Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Low to moderately high
(0.01 to 0.20 in/hr)
Depth to water table:About 24 to 42 inches
Frequency of flooding:None
Frequency of ponding:None
Calcium carbonate, maximum content:40 percent
Available water capacity:Low (about 5.2 inches)
Interpretive groups
Farmland classification:All areas are prime farmland
Land capability (nonirrigated):2e
Hydrologic Soil Group:C
Other vegetative classification:Trees/Timber (Woody Vegetation)
Typical profile
0 to 7 inches:Silt loam
7 to 30 inches:Clay loam
30 to 60 inches:Loam
MoC3—Miami clay loam, 6 to 12 percent slopes, severely eroded
Map Unit Setting
Elevation:600 to 1,200 feet
Mean annual precipitation:36 to 43 inches
Mean annual air temperature:48 to 54 degrees F
Frost-free period:150 to 185 days
Map Unit Composition
Miami, severely eroded, and similar soils:97 percent
Minor components:3 percent
Description of Miami, Severely Eroded
Setting
Landform:Till plains
Landform position (two-dimensional):Shoulder, backslope
Landform position (three-dimensional):Side slope
Down-slope shape:Convex
Custom Soil Resource Report
14
Across-slope shape:Linear
Parent material:Loamy till
Properties and qualities
Slope:6 to 12 percent
Depth to restrictive feature:24 to 40 inches to densic material
Drainage class:Moderately well drained
Capacity of the most limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat):Low to moderately high
(0.01 to 0.20 in/hr)
Depth to water table:About 24 to 36 inches
Frequency of flooding:None
Frequency of ponding:None
Calcium carbonate, maximum content:45 percent
Maximum salinity:Nonsaline (0.0 to 2.0 mmhos/cm)
Available water capacity:Low (about 4.8 inches)
Interpretive groups
Farmland classification:Not prime farmland
Land capability (nonirrigated):4e
Hydrologic Soil Group:C
Other vegetative classification:Trees/Timber (Woody Vegetation)
Typical profile
0 to 6 inches:Clay loam
6 to 29 inches:Clay loam
29 to 34 inches:Loam
34 to 80 inches:Loam
Minor Components
Crosby
Percent of map unit:3 percent
Landform:Till plains
Landform position (three-dimensional):Interfluve
Other vegetative classification:Trees/Timber (Woody Vegetation)
Custom Soil Resource Report
15
Soil Information for All Uses
Soil Reports
The Soil Reports section includes various formatted tabular and narrative reports
(tables) containing data for each selected soil map unit and each component of each
unit. No aggregation of data has occurred as is done in reports in the Soil Properties
and Qualities and Suitabilities and Limitations sections.
The reports contain soil interpretive information as well as basic soil properties and
qualities. A description of each report (table) is included.
Building Site Development
This folder contains a collection of tabular reports that present soil interpretations
related to building site development. The reports (tables) include all selected map units
and components for each map unit, limiting features and interpretive ratings. Building
site development interpretations are designed to be used as tools for evaluating soil
suitability and identifying soil limitations for various construction purposes. As part of
the interpretation process, the rating applies to each soil in its described condition and
does not consider present land use. Example interpretations can include corrosion of
concrete and steel, shallow excavations, dwellings with and without basements, small
commercial buildings, local roads and streets, and lawns and landscaping.
Dwellings and Small Commercial Buildings (A&W
File: 13IN0473)
Soil properties influence the development of building sites, including the selection of
the site, the design of the structure, construction, performance after construction, and
maintenance. This table shows the degree and kind of soil limitations that affect
dwellings and small commercial buildings.
The ratings in the table are both verbal and numerical. Rating class terms indicate the
extent to which the soils are limited by all of the soil features that affect building site
development. Not limited indicates that the soil has features that are very favorable
for the specified use. Good performance and very low maintenance can be expected.
Somewhat limited indicates that the soil has features that are moderately favorable
for the specified use. The limitations can be overcome or minimized by special
planning, design, or installation. Fair performance and moderate maintenance can be
expected. Very limited indicates that the soil has one or more features that are
16
unfavorable for the specified use. The limitations generally cannot be overcome
without major soil reclamation, special design, or expensive installation procedures.
Poor performance and high maintenance can be expected.
Numerical ratings in the table indicate the severity of individual limitations. The ratings
are shown as decimal fractions ranging from 0.01 to 1.00. They indicate gradations
between the point at which a soil feature has the greatest negative impact on the use
(1.00) and the point at which the soil feature is not a limitation (0.00).
Dwellings are single-family houses of three stories or less. For dwellings without
basements, the foundation is assumed to consist of spread footings of reinforced
concrete built on undisturbed soil at a depth of 2 feet or at the depth of maximum frost
penetration, whichever is deeper. For dwellings with basements, the foundation is
assumed to consist of spread footings of reinforced concrete built on undisturbed soil
at a depth of about 7 feet. The ratings for dwellings are based on the soil properties
that affect the capacity of the soil to support a load without movement and on the
properties that affect excavation and construction costs. The properties that affect the
load-supporting capacity include depth to a water table, ponding, flooding,
subsidence, linear extensibility (shrink-swell potential), and compressibility.
Compressibility is inferred from the Unified classification. The properties that affect
the ease and amount of excavation include depth to a water table, ponding, flooding,
slope, depth to bedrock or a cemented pan, hardness of bedrock or a cemented pan,
and the amount and size of rock fragments.
Small commercial buildings are structures that are less than three stories high and do
not have basements. The foundation is assumed to consist of spread footings of
reinforced concrete built on undisturbed soil at a depth of 2 feet or at the depth of
maximum frost penetration, whichever is deeper. The ratings are based on the soil
properties that affect the capacity of the soil to support a load without movement and
on the properties that affect excavation and construction costs. The properties that
affect the load-supporting capacity include depth to a water table, ponding, flooding,
subsidence, linear extensibility (shrink-swell potential), and compressibility (which is
inferred from the Unified classification). The properties that affect the ease and amount
of excavation include flooding, depth to a water table, ponding, slope, depth to bedrock
or a cemented pan, hardness of bedrock or a cemented pan, and the amount and size
of rock fragments.
Information in this table is intended for land use planning, for evaluating land use
alternatives, and for planning site investigations prior to design and construction. The
information, however, has limitations. For example, estimates and other data generally
apply only to that part of the soil between the surface and a depth of 5 to 7 feet.
Because of the map scale, small areas of different soils may be included within the
mapped areas of a specific soil.
The information is not site specific and does not eliminate the need for onsite
investigation of the soils or for testing and analysis by personnel experienced in the
design and construction of engineering works.
Government ordinances and regulations that restrict certain land uses or impose
specific design criteria were not considered in preparing the information in this table.
Local ordinances and regulations should be considered in planning, in site selection,
and in design.
Custom Soil Resource Report
17
Report—Dwellings and Small Commercial Buildings (A&W
File: 13IN0473)
[Onsite investigation may be needed to validate the interpretations in this table and to
confirm the identity of the soil on a given site. The numbers in the value columns range
from 0.01 to 1.00. The larger the value, the greater the potential limitation. The table
shows only the top five limitations for any given soil. The soil may have additional
limitations]
Dwellings and Small Commercial Buildings–Hamilton County, Indiana
Map symbol and soil
name
Pct. of
map
unit
Dwellings without basements Dwellings with basements Small commercial buildings
Rating class and
limiting features
Value Rating class and
limiting features
Value Rating class and
limiting features
Value
Br—Brookston silty
clay loam
Brookston 100 Very limited Very limited Very limited
Ponding 1.00 Ponding 1.00 Ponding 1.00
Depth to saturated
zone
1.00 Depth to saturated
zone
1.00 Depth to saturated
zone
1.00
Shrink-swell 0.50 Shrink-swell 0.45 Shrink-swell 0.50
CrA—Crosby silt loam,
0 to 3 percent slopes
Crosby 90 Very limited Very limited Very limited
Depth to saturated
zone
1.00 Depth to saturated
zone
1.00 Depth to saturated
zone
1.00
Shrink-swell 0.50 Shrink-swell 0.50
MmB2—Miami silt
loam, 2 to 6 percent
slopes, eroded
Miami 100 Somewhat limited Somewhat limited Somewhat limited
Shrink-swell 0.50 Depth to saturated
zone
0.99 Shrink-swell 0.50
Slope 0.13
MoC3—Miami clay
loam, 6 to 12 percent
slopes, severely
eroded
Miami, severely
eroded
97 Somewhat limited Very limited Very limited
Shrink-swell 0.50 Depth to saturated
zone
1.00 Slope 1.00
Slope 0.04 Slope 0.04 Shrink-swell 0.50
Custom Soil Resource Report
18
Soil Physical Properties
This folder contains a collection of tabular reports that present soil physical properties.
The reports (tables) include all selected map units and components for each map unit.
Soil physical properties are measured or inferred from direct observations in the field
or laboratory. Examples of soil physical properties include percent clay, organic
matter, saturated hydraulic conductivity, available water capacity, and bulk density.
Engineering Properties (A&W File: 13IN0473)
This table gives the engineering classifications and the range of engineering
properties for the layers of each soil in the survey area.
Depth to the upper and lower boundaries of each layer is indicated.
Texture is given in the standard terms used by the U.S. Department of Agriculture.
These terms are defined according to percentages of sand, silt, and clay in the fraction
of the soil that is less than 2 millimeters in diameter. "Loam," for example, is soil that
is 7 to 27 percent clay, 28 to 50 percent silt, and less than 52 percent sand. If the
content of particles coarser than sand is 15 percent or more, an appropriate modifier
is added, for example, "gravelly."
Classification of the soils is determined according to the Unified soil classification
system (ASTM, 2005) and the system adopted by the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO, 2004).
The Unified system classifies soils according to properties that affect their use as
construction material. Soils are classified according to particle-size distribution of the
fraction less than 3 inches in diameter and according to plasticity index, liquid limit,
and organic matter content. Sandy and gravelly soils are identified as GW, GP, GM,
GC, SW, SP, SM, and SC; silty and clayey soils as ML, CL, OL, MH, CH, and OH;
and highly organic soils as PT. Soils exhibiting engineering properties of two groups
can have a dual classification, for example, CL-ML.
The AASHTO system classifies soils according to those properties that affect roadway
construction and maintenance. In this system, the fraction of a mineral soil that is less
than 3 inches in diameter is classified in one of seven groups from A-1 through A-7
on the basis of particle-size distribution, liquid limit, and plasticity index. Soils in group
A-1 are coarse grained and low in content of fines (silt and clay). At the other extreme,
soils in group A-7 are fine grained. Highly organic soils are classified in group A-8 on
the basis of visual inspection.
If laboratory data are available, the A-1, A-2, and A-7 groups are further classified as
A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4, A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-7-5, or A-7-6. As an additional refinement,
the suitability of a soil as subgrade material can be indicated by a group index number.
Group index numbers range from 0 for the best subgrade material to 20 or higher for
the poorest.
Rock fragments larger than 10 inches in diameter and 3 to 10 inches in diameter are
indicated as a percentage of the total soil on a dry-weight basis. The percentages are
estimates determined mainly by converting volume percentage in the field to weight
percentage.
Custom Soil Resource Report
19
Percentage (of soil particles) passing designated sieves is the percentage of the soil
fraction less than 3 inches in diameter based on an ovendry weight. The sieves,
numbers 4, 10, 40, and 200 (USA Standard Series), have openings of 4.76, 2.00,
0.420, and 0.074 millimeters, respectively. Estimates are based on laboratory tests of
soils sampled in the survey area and in nearby areas and on estimates made in the
field.
Liquid limit and plasticity index (Atterberg limits) indicate the plasticity characteristics
of a soil. The estimates are based on test data from the survey area or from nearby
areas and on field examination.
References:
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2004.
Standard specifications for transportation materials and methods of sampling and
testing. 24th edition.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2005. Standard classification of
soils for engineering purposes. ASTM Standard D2487-00.
Custom Soil Resource Report
20
Absence of an entry indicates that the data were not estimated. The asterisk '*' denotes the representative texture; other possible
textures follow the dash.
Engineering Properties–Hamilton County, Indiana
Map unit symbol and soil
name
Depth USDA texture Classification Fragments Percentage passing sieve number—Liquid
limit
Plasticity
index
Unified AASHTO >10
inches
3-10
inches
4 10 40 200
In Pct Pct Pct
Br—Brookston silty clay
loam
Brookston 0-11 *Silty clay loam CL A-6, A-7,
A-7-6
0 0 90-100 90-100 85-100 75-95 35-50 10-30
11-58 *Clay loam, Silty clay loam,
loam
CL A-4, A-6 0 0 95-100 90-98 85-95 80-85 30-50 10-25
58-70 *Loam, Fine sandy loam CL, CL-
ML
A-4, A-6 0-1 0-3 90-100 85-95 78-90 55-70 15-40 5-20
CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to
3 percent slopes
Crosby 0-11 *Silt loam CL, CL-
ML, ML
A-4, A-6 0 0 98-100 90-98 85-95 65-85 20-30 NP-15
11-27 *Clay loam, Silty clay loam CL A-6, A-7,
A-7-6
0 0-3 95-100 90-100 85-95 55-80 35-50 10-30
27-32 *Loam, Clay loam CL A-4, A-6 0 0-3 95-100 90-100 85-95 55-70 30-40 5-25
32-60 *Loam, Fine sandy loam CL, CL-
ML, ML
A-4, A-6 0 0-3 90-100 85-98 75-90 45-70 15-30 NP-15
MmB2—Miami silt loam, 2
to 6 percent slopes,
eroded
Miami 0-7 *Silt loam CL, CL-
ML, ML
A-4 0 0 95-100 90-100 85-95 55-70 15-30 3-10
7-30 *Clay loam, Silty clay loam,
sandy clay loam
CL A-6, A-7 0 0 95-100 90-100 85-95 55-80 30-50 10-30
30-60 *Loam, Fine sandy loam CL, CL-
ML, ML
A-4, A-6 0-1 0-3 90-100 85-98 75-90 45-70 15-30 NP-20
Custom Soil Resource Report
21
Engineering Properties–Hamilton County, Indiana
Map unit symbol and soil
name
Depth USDA texture Classification Fragments Percentage passing sieve number—Liquid
limit
Plasticity
index
Unified AASHTO >10
inches
3-10
inches
4 10 40 200
In Pct Pct Pct
MoC3—Miami clay loam, 6
to 12 percent slopes,
severely eroded
Miami, severely eroded 0-6 *Clay loam CL A-6 0-1 0 95-100 93-100 78-95 60-85 35-47 18-24
6-29 *Clay loam, Silty clay loam CL A-7-6, A-6 0-1 0-5 90-100 85-100 75-95 55-85 30-50 11-31
29-34 *Loam, Fine sandy loam CL, ML,
SC, SM
A-6, A-4 0-1 0-5 90-98 85-98 65-95 40-70 15-37 9-22
34-80 *Loam, Fine sandy loam CL, ML,
SC, SM
A-4, A-6 0-1 0-5 90-98 85-98 65-90 40-70 15-30 6-15
Custom Soil Resource Report
22
Water Features
This folder contains tabular reports that present soil hydrology information. The reports
(tables) include all selected map units and components for each map unit. Water
Features include ponding frequency, flooding frequency, and depth to water table.
Water Features (A&W File: 13IN0473)
This table gives estimates of various soil water features. The estimates are used in
land use planning that involves engineering considerations.
Hydrologic soil groups are based on estimates of runoff potential. Soils are assigned
to one of four groups according to the rate of water infiltration when the soils are not
protected by vegetation, are thoroughly wet, and receive precipitation from long-
duration storms.
The four hydrologic soil groups are:
Group A. Soils having a high infiltration rate (low runoff potential) when thoroughly
wet. These consist mainly of deep, well drained to excessively drained sands or
gravelly sands. These soils have a high rate of water transmission.
Group B. Soils having a moderate infiltration rate when thoroughly wet. These consist
chiefly of moderately deep or deep, moderately well drained or well drained soils that
have moderately fine texture to moderately coarse texture. These soils have a
moderate rate of water transmission.
Group C. Soils having a slow infiltration rate when thoroughly wet. These consist
chiefly of soils having a layer that impedes the downward movement of water or soils
of moderately fine texture or fine texture. These soils have a slow rate of water
transmission.
Group D. Soils having a very slow infiltration rate (high runoff potential) when
thoroughly wet. These consist chiefly of clays that have a high shrink-swell potential,
soils that have a high water table, soils that have a claypan or clay layer at or near the
surface, and soils that are shallow over nearly impervious material. These soils have
a very slow rate of water transmission.
If a soil is assigned to a dual hydrologic group (A/D, B/D, or C/D), the first letter is for
drained areas and the second is for undrained areas.
Surface runoff refers to the loss of water from an area by flow over the land surface.
Surface runoff classes are based on slope, climate, and vegetative cover. The concept
indicates relative runoff for very specific conditions. It is assumed that the surface of
the soil is bare and that the retention of surface water resulting from irregularities in
the ground surface is minimal. The classes are negligible, very low, low, medium, high,
and very high.
The months in the table indicate the portion of the year in which a water table, ponding,
and/or flooding is most likely to be a concern.
Water table refers to a saturated zone in the soil. The water features table indicates,
by month, depth to the top (upper limit) and base (lower limit) of the saturated zone in
most years. Estimates of the upper and lower limits are based mainly on observations
of the water table at selected sites and on evidence of a saturated zone, namely
Custom Soil Resource Report
23
grayish colors or mottles (redoximorphic features) in the soil. A saturated zone that
lasts for less than a month is not considered a water table.
Ponding is standing water in a closed depression. Unless a drainage system is
installed, the water is removed only by percolation, transpiration, or evaporation. The
table indicates surface water depth and the duration and frequency of ponding.
Duration is expressed as very brief if less than 2 days, brief if 2 to 7 days, long if 7 to
30 days, and very long if more than 30 days. Frequency is expressed as none, rare,
occasional, and frequent. None means that ponding is not probable; rare that it is
unlikely but possible under unusual weather conditions (the chance of ponding is
nearly 0 percent to 5 percent in any year); occasional that it occurs, on the average,
once or less in 2 years (the chance of ponding is 5 to 50 percent in any year); and
frequent that it occurs, on the average, more than once in 2 years (the chance of
ponding is more than 50 percent in any year).
Flooding is the temporary inundation of an area caused by overflowing streams, by
runoff from adjacent slopes, or by tides. Water standing for short periods after rainfall
or snowmelt is not considered flooding, and water standing in swamps and marshes
is considered ponding rather than flooding.
Duration and frequency are estimated. Duration is expressed as extremely brief if 0.1
hour to 4 hours, very brief if 4 hours to 2 days, brief if 2 to 7 days, long if 7 to 30 days,
and very long if more than 30 days. Frequency is expressed as none, very rare, rare,
occasional, frequent, and very frequent. None means that flooding is not probable;
very rare that it is very unlikely but possible under extremely unusual weather
conditions (the chance of flooding is less than 1 percent in any year); rare that it is
unlikely but possible under unusual weather conditions (the chance of flooding is 1 to
5 percent in any year); occasional that it occurs infrequently under normal weather
conditions (the chance of flooding is 5 to 50 percent in any year); frequent that it is
likely to occur often under normal weather conditions (the chance of flooding is more
than 50 percent in any year but is less than 50 percent in all months in any year); and
very frequent that it is likely to occur very often under normal weather conditions (the
chance of flooding is more than 50 percent in all months of any year).
The information is based on evidence in the soil profile, namely thin strata of gravel,
sand, silt, or clay deposited by floodwater; irregular decrease in organic matter content
with increasing depth; and little or no horizon development.
Also considered are local information about the extent and levels of flooding and the
relation of each soil on the landscape to historic floods. Information on the extent of
flooding based on soil data is less specific than that provided by detailed engineering
surveys that delineate flood-prone areas at specific flood frequency levels.
Custom Soil Resource Report
24
Absence of an entry indicates that the data were not estimated. The dash indicates no documented presence.
Water Features–Hamilton County, Indiana
Map unit symbol and soil
name
Hydrologic
group
Surface
runoff
Month Water table Ponding Flooding
Upper limit Lower limit Surface
depth
Duration Frequency Duration Frequency
Ft Ft Ft
Br—Brookston silty clay loam
Brookston B/D Negligible January 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
February 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
March 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
April 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
May 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
December 0.0-1.0 >6.0 0.0-0.5 Long Frequent —None
CrA—Crosby silt loam, 0 to 3
percent slopes
Crosby C/D Medium January 0.5-2.0 2.0-3.5 ——None —None
February 0.5-2.0 2.0-3.5 ——None —None
March 0.5-2.0 2.0-3.5 ——None —None
April 0.5-2.0 2.0-3.5 ——None —None
December 0.5-2.0 2.0-3.5 ——None —None
MmB2—Miami silt loam, 2 to
6 percent slopes, eroded
Miami C High January 2.0-3.5 2.5-3.5 ——None —None
February 2.0-3.5 2.5-3.5 ——None —None
March 2.0-3.5 2.5-3.5 ——None —None
April 2.0-3.5 2.5-3.5 ——None —None
December 2.0-3.5 2.5-3.5 ——None —None
Custom Soil Resource Report
25
Water Features–Hamilton County, Indiana
Map unit symbol and soil
name
Hydrologic
group
Surface
runoff
Month Water table Ponding Flooding
Upper limit Lower limit Surface
depth
Duration Frequency Duration Frequency
Ft Ft Ft
MoC3—Miami clay loam, 6 to
12 percent slopes, severely
eroded
Miami, severely eroded C Very high January 2.0-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
February 2.0-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
March 2.0-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
April 2.0-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
May 2.5-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
June 2.5-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
October 2.5-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
November 2.5-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
December 2.0-3.0 2.5-3.3 ——None —None
Custom Soil Resource Report
26
References
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2004.
Standard specifications for transportation materials and methods of sampling and
testing. 24th edition.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2005. Standard classification of
soils for engineering purposes. ASTM Standard D2487-00.
Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of
wetlands and deep-water habitats of the United States. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
FWS/OBS-79/31.
Federal Register. July 13, 1994. Changes in hydric soils of the United States.
Federal Register. September 18, 2002. Hydric soils of the United States.
Hurt, G.W., and L.M. Vasilas, editors. Version 6.0, 2006. Field indicators of hydric soils
in the United States.
National Research Council. 1995. Wetlands: Characteristics and boundaries.
Soil Survey Division Staff. 1993. Soil survey manual. Soil Conservation Service. U.S.
Department of Agriculture Handbook 18. http://soils.usda.gov/
Soil Survey Staff. 1999. Soil taxonomy: A basic system of soil classification for making
and interpreting soil surveys. 2nd edition. Natural Resources Conservation Service,
U.S. Department of Agriculture Handbook 436. http://soils.usda.gov/
Soil Survey Staff. 2006. Keys to soil taxonomy. 10th edition. U.S. Department of
Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service. http://soils.usda.gov/
Tiner, R.W., Jr. 1985. Wetlands of Delaware. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and
Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control, Wetlands
Section.
United States Army Corps of Engineers, Environmental Laboratory. 1987. Corps of
Engineers wetlands delineation manual. Waterways Experiment Station Technical
Report Y-87-1.
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service.
National forestry manual. http://soils.usda.gov/
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service.
National range and pasture handbook. http://www.glti.nrcs.usda.gov/
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service.
National soil survey handbook, title 430-VI. http://soils.usda.gov/
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service.
2006. Land resource regions and major land resource areas of the United States, the
Caribbean, and the Pacific Basin. U.S. Department of Agriculture Handbook 296.
http://soils.usda.gov/
27
United States Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service. 1961. Land
capability classification. U.S. Department of Agriculture Handbook 210.
Custom Soil Resource Report
28
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 00310 - 1
SECTION 00310 - AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
PART 1 - EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS
1.1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is included with this document: 1. Title: Subsurface Investigation and Geotechnical Recommendations. 2. Date: September 30, 2011. 3. Prepared By: Alt & Witzig Engineering, Inc. Geotechnical Division
4. Phone: 317.875.7000 5. Project Number: 11IN0520.
B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of
foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Architect.
C. Contractor is urged to examine subsurface investigation data.
D. Contractor should visit the site and become acquainted with existing conditions.
E. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions
be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to Owner.
F. Interpretation: This report is provided only for information and convenience. Owner and Architect disclaim
responsibility for accuracy, true location and extent of soil conditions that have been evaluated by others. Owner and Architect further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of the report data by Contractor; including but not limited to projecting soil bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability, and presence, level,
and extent of underground water.
1.2 TESTED ASSEMBLY DATA
A. Tested assembly data for specified fire-resistive assemblies and systems is required to be provided as part of the building permit documents. This data is included in the Drawings.
B. Contractor is urged to examine data provided.
C. Interpretation: Tested assembly data is provided only for information and convenience. Owner and Architect disclaim responsibility for data that has been prepared by others. Owner and Architect further
disclaim responsibility for interpretation of the data by Contractor.
END OF SECTION 00310
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00720 - 1
SECTION 00720 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1 AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2007 Edition, is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor.
A. In the event of conflict, provisions of the Agreement take precedence over provisions in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
PART 2 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
2.1 Refer to Document 00730 for amendments to these General Conditions.
END OF SECTION 00720
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 - 1
SECTION 00730 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - INTENT
1.1 These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions defined in Section
00720 and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so
amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
1.2 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions.
PART 2 - MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.1 ARTICLE 1.2 - EXECUTION, CORRELATION, AND INTENT
A. Add to paragraph 1.2 the following sub-paragraph 1.2.8: 1. 1.2.8: Division 01 General Requirements expand on the broad provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, and govern the execution of the work of all Sections of the specifications. Division 01
General Requirements specify certain administrative and procedural requirements not covered in the General Conditions relating to execution of the Work, and temporary facilities for use during the construction period.
2.2 ARTICLE 4.10 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Add to paragraph 4.10 the following sub-paragraph 4.10.4: 1. 4.10.4: Owner and Architect's review of the progress schedule is solely for the purpose of familiarizing themselves with the Contractor's intent. If the progress schedule indicates a
completion date earlier than the completion date stipulated in the Contract, no claims by the Contractor for delay will be allowed for any reason if the Work can still be completed on or before the completion date stipulated in the Contract.
2.3 ARTICLE 7.2 - CHANGE ORDERS
A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 7.3.10: The Agreement identifies the overhead and profit fees applicable for Changes in the Work, whether additions to or deductions from the Work on which the Contract Sum is based and
identifies the fees for subcontract work for changes (both additions and deductions) in the Work. The Contractor shall apply fees in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
2.4 ARTICLE 7.3 - CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 7.3.10: The Agreement identifies the overhead and profit fees applicable for Changes in the Work, whether additions to or deductions from the Work on which the Contract Sum is based and identifies the fees for subcontract work for changes (both additions and deductions) in the Work.
The Contractor shall apply fees in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00730 - 2
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
B. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 8.1.5: Contract Time is identified in the Agreement.
END OF SECTION 00730
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUMMARY 01100 - 1
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: 1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Owner-furnished products.
5. Access to site. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification and drawing conventions.
B. Related Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Carmel Senior Living. 1. Project Location: SW quadrant of 136th Street and Illinois Street, Carmel, Indiana 46032
B. Owner: Spectrum Retirement Communities, LLC, 200 Spruce Street, Suite 200, Denver, Colorado 80230,
303-360-8812. Owner’s representative, Michael Longfellow, Senior Vice President of Construction and Development.
C. Architect: Gastinger Walker Harden + BeeTriplett Buck, 817 Wyandotte, Kansas City, Missouri 64105, 816-421-8200.
D. Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineering and Landscape Design: Weihe Engineers, 10505 N. College Avenue,
Indianapolis, Indiana 46280, 317-846-6611. 2. Food Service Design: Santee / Becker Associates, LLC, 6700 Squibb Road, Suite 101, Mission, Kansas 66202, 913-362-1800.
E. Contractor: TBD.
1.4 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the
Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUMMARY 01100 - 2
B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Emergency nurse call and door monitoring system
2. Security 3. Telephone/Data 4. Audio/Visual
C. Subsequent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following additional work to be
performed at site following Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Furniture Fixture and Equipment with the exception of the food service equipment
1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.
B. Owner-Furnished Products:
1. Residential appliances specified in Section 11451.
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other
contractors on portions of Project.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and
to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work
to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.
3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.
1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Upon partial occupancy by owner, coordinate remainder of work hours and access to areas to
minimize impact on occupants.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUMMARY 01100 - 3
1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the
individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification
Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
1.10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1
SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been
established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to the Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances.
C. Related Sections:
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying
the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate
installation.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2
1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance less applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable
taxes, less trade discounts.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged
or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 2: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000 per elevator cab for the purchase, delivery and installation of upgraded elevator cab finishes to be determined.
END OF SECTION 01210
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description
will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments
to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract
Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner
and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances.
2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of submittal schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect in duplicate at earliest possible date but no later than fifteen days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for
each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2
b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier. f. Approved Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-
place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
Architect and paid for by Owner.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and
items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Materials previously stored and included in previous Applications for Payment. b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. c. Additional materials stored with this Application.
d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application.
F. Transmittal: Submit four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With three of the four copies of the Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
H. Payment backup: With three of four copies of the application for payment, submit backup invoices and receipts of labor and material for work completed.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as
substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 4
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings.
4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project meetings.
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are
assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
4. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with Owner's commissioning authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during
construction.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space
availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1.6 KEY PERSONNEL
A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work
of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name.
2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 3
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with
response.
1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 4
e. Distribution of the Contract Documents. f. Submittal procedures. g. Preparation of record documents.
h. Construction waste management and recycling. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings biweekly. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Field condition reports. 3. Special reports.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
C. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
D. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
E. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist with at least 2 years experience in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 48 hours of Architect's request.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress
reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final
Completion.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. Indicate critical path items. 2. Identify each item by specification section number. 3. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
4. Include conferences and meetings in schedule. 5. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.
6. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, owner-furnished products, Products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3
7. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
8. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited
to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered RFIs. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals.
E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew
sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the start-up construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM
scheduling.
1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.
2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: Prior to each progress meeting, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and
inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01320
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration
of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals.
C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for
representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow ten working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow ten working days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow fifteen working days for initial review of each submittal.
C. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
d. Name of subcontractor. e. Name of supplier. f. Name of manufacturer.
g. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. i. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. j. Related physical samples submitted directly.
k. Other necessary identification.
D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.
E. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
G. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual
Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 4. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations
expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
H. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
I. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
J. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
K. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
L. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
M. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5
Q. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.
R. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
T. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
U. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if
applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of
the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.
Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does
not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance
and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are
not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and subassemblies.
3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall
mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3
6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect fourteen days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at the Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and
products for which mockups are required in individual specification sections, along with supporting materials.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will
engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they
so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report
results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation
of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control
services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and
reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
7. <Insert other requirements>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 7
the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 1
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and
requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"
"selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled,"
and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and
similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and
similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be
built.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise
indicated.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 2
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960
www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800 www.transportation.org
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155
www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700
www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216
www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 3
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org
AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955
www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372
www.aosaseed.com APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 4
APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500
(American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300 www.awci.org
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636
www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 5
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)
www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772
www.bissc.org BWF Badminton World Federation 6-03-9283 7155 (Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation)
www.internationalbadminton.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880
www.carpetcushion.org
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca
CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137
www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 6
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org
CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org
CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744
www.caststone.org
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700
www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500
www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 7
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org
ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
www.intertek.com FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00
(The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35
(The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch
FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com
FMRC Factory Mutual Research
(Now FM Global)
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772
www.floridaroof.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Part of GSI)
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org
HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267-9700
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 8
www.pumps.org HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200
www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900
www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com
IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International)
IBF International Badminton Federation (Now BWF)
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830
www.icri.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000
www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561
www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 9
www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732
www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA
(Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org
LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138
www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222
www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613
www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 10
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext. 453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084
www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-2300
www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901
www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200
www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 11
NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com
NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 www.nomma.org
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
www.nsf.org
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association
(Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
(Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS)
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 12
http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522
(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339
www.redwoodinspection.com (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424
SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE)
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995
www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association
www.smacna.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 13
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026
www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA)
TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700 www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700
www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010
www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 14
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) (212) 297-2109
www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) (847) 299-5200
www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 15
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000
www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220
www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167
www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322
www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 16
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Buildings Service
(See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694
www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 17
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080
www.access-board.gov
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date
as of the date of the Contract Documents. CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings
and Thermal Insulation
(800) 952-5210
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041
CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 www.calregs.com CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782
www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
REFERENCES 01420 - 18
Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01420
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 2. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.
3. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for
construction operations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a
construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing;
minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-
OD corner and pull posts.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and
foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Space of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power
service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with table and chairs. 3. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature. 4. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
C. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service. New permanent facilities may not be used.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a
condition acceptable to Owner.
H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.
2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove
before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.
C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved
areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved
areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,
proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final
course according to Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving."
D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain
Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs of design and construction to be determined.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. 1. Materials to be recycled or reused on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-
combustible containers.
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided
stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for
Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
C. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: Six foot high fence around construction site. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire
ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to
water limits.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and
aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special
warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or
other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify
Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2
receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected
products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,
Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation
and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights
for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered, unless
otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article
for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a
comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed
product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both
standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 1
SECTION 01635 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product
submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of
required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided,
if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities
may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 2
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase
order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related
materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven
days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with
related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 3
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests
without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01635
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures prior to the time cutting and patching will
be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and
patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services and systems will be disrupted.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two
or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with
cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch
blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 6
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not hold waste on site for more than 7 days. Do not bury or burn waste materials on-
site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 7
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction
photographic documentation. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel. 6. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and
reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a
final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the PDF electronic file format.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project
name, and name of Contractor. 4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of
contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply
with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or
that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report upon completion of cleaning. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace
burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in [Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."] [Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."]
END OF SECTION 01770
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.
4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating project record documents
covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for final property survey. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping
requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
E. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated in Project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and
other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding
marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation
and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not
wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1
SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.
3. Division 1 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name.
Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 2
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and
maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of
Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual
shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 3
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,
include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning
of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual
composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.
F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to
hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of
equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate
Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software
storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert
typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 4
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak.
5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment
indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 5
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source
information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to
match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 6
service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with
standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of
maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 7
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual
for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using
appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the
information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.
Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01810 - 1
SECTION 01810 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to
specific systems, assemblies, or components.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Facilities Exterior Enclosure Commissioning" for commissioning process
activities for building exterior enclosure, roof, and foundation systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 2. Division 1 Section "Interiors Commissioning" for commissioning process activities for building
interiors construction, stairways, and finish systems and assemblies. 3. Division 1 Section "Plumbing Systems Commissioning Process Requirements" for commissioning process activities for plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 4. Division 1 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for HVAC&R
systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 5. Division 1 Section "Electrical Systems Commissioning Process Requirements" for commissioning process activities for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
6. Division 1 Section "Communications Systems Commissioning Process Requirements" for commissioning process activities for communications systems and electronic safety and security systems, assemblies, equipment, and components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.
B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project
and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.
E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately,
they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01810 - 2
1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated
action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
B. Members Appointed by Owner:
1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract.
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. 3. Architect and engineering design professionals.
1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.
B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities.
C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and
Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule
them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity
responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. 2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. 3. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 4. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA.
5. Complete electronic construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the Commissioning Authority on a regular basis. 6. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the Commissioning
Authority. 7. Complete commissioning process test procedures.
1.7 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Organize and lead the commissioning team.
B. Provide commissioning plan.
C. Convene commissioning team meetings.
D. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01810 - 3
E. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify
compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
F. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.
G. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.
H. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.
I. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual and commissioning process report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01810
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1
SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer.
D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the following:
1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do
not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2
B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor,
certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing
service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, terms for agreement period, and terms for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each
specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control
treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 3
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical
termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including
footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating
the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02361
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
This page is intentionally left blank.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03100 - 1
SECTION 03100 – CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2006.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
C. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 1995.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place
concrete work.
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape,
lines, and dimensions.
C. Comply with applicable code with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of
formwork.
D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I.
2.03 PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, cone type, with waterproofing
washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, contain
oils or waxes, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on
concrete.
C. Corners: Filleted, rigid plastic type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03100 - 2
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with Drawings.
3.02 EARTH FORMS
A. Earth forms are permitted for trench grade beams only.
3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
Drawings.
F. Provide fillet strips on exposed external corners of items indicated on Drawings.
G. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03100 - 3
F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.06 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.
Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged
forms.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03200 - 1
SECTION 03200 – CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
C. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2006.
D. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2006.
E. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
1. Provide 1/8 inch minimum scale elevations of all walls and grade beams with reinforcing
shown.
2. Show splice locations, if any.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this Section in accordance with ACI 301.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of at least 25%.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.
1. Flat Sheets.
2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE REINFORCING 03200 - 2
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement. Wood, brick, or other foreign material is not
permitted.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at point of minimum stress.
1. Review locations of splices with Architect/Engineer.
2. Show splice locations on shop drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as specified on Drawings.
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
directions; splice laps with tie wire.
F. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles and substances.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency shall inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract
documents before concrete placement.
B. Reinforcing with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work:
1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.
2. Bends or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final shop drawings.
3. Bars with reduced cross-sections due to excessive rusting or other cause.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
SECTION 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Floors and slabs on grade.
B. Concrete foundation walls.
C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, thrust blocks, and
similar items.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004.
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999.
F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988
(Reapproved 2002).
G. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete; 2005.
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2005.
I. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003.
J. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2005.
K. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2005.
L. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a.
M. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2005.
N. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2001.
O. ASTM C 230/C 230M - Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement; 2003.
P. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001.
Q. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2005a.
R. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete; 2005.
S. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2001.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
T. ASTM C 881/C 881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 2002.
U. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; 1999.
V. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2005.
W. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004.
X. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
Y. ASTM E 1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2001).
Z. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements.
B. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required
with adjacent construction for concrete accessories.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Provide written certification for each admixture actually used that
admixtures contain no thiocyanates, and admixtures do not exceed 0.1 percent chloride ions.
E. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix design for each class of concrete specified. Include
proportions of ingredients, aggregate analysis, cement brand and type, slump, water/cement ratio,
and strength test reports for 7 and 28 day strengths.
1. Prepare in accordance with ACI 301.
F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this Section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II - Normal Portland type.
1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
1. Limit use to 15 percent of cement content, by weight, unless otherwise specified.
D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type F.
D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type E.
E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type D.
F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C.
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B.
H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A.
I. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
J. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B; pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, and manufacturer's specified water reducing and plasticizing agents; non-
staining, non-gas-forming, containing no chlorides; flowable or plastic consistency as measured
according to ASTM C 230; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi in
28 days.
B. Curing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03 3900.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881M and of Type required for
specific application.
C. Epoxy Filler: Two-part liquid, 100 percent solids epoxy resin, gray color.
D. Epoxy Resin: Two-part, pourable or injection-applied epoxy resin, honey gray color.
E. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion
during placement.
1. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Size: 1/2 inch throat, 1/2 inch deep.
F. Waterstops: Expanding type, approximately 75 percent sodium bentonite content; Waterstop-RX
Concrete Joint Waterstop manufactured by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company.
G. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard, felt, or cork, complying with
ASTM D 1751, thickness as indicated on Drawings and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.
H. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,
with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center;
ribbed steel stakes for setting.
1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation.
2. Height: To suit slab thickness.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Deliver concrete and discharge entire load within 1-1/2 hours, or before drum has turned 300
revolutions, whichever occurs first, after introduction of mixing water.
E. During cold weather (below 45 degrees F), use heated water and aggregates if necessary to
maintain concrete temperature between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
F. Notes to Schedule of Concrete Mixes:
1. W/C is the ratio of weight of water to weight of cementitious materials. The weight of water
includes all free water in aggregate at the time of batching.
2. Minimum cementitious materials are the minimum weight of Portland Cement plus fly ash,
if included in mix design.
3. Provide the minimum amount of cement content necessary to satisfy strength requirements
and reduce total water required with MR-WR admixture, to minimize drying shrinkage.
4. Maximum Allowed Shrinkage: 0.040 percent according to ASTM C 157/C 157M.
G. Normal Weight Concrete - General Requirements:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days:
Varies; see general notes on structural Drawings.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Cement Content: Varies according to specified strengths; submit mix design.
4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 50 percent by weight.
5. Total Air Content: Do not allow air content for trowel finished slabs-on-grade to exceed 3%.
6. Maximum Slump: 2 to 4 inches.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
H. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics
of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances indicate necessary
adjustments, at no additional cost to the Owner, and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test
data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to Architect and accepted
before use of revised mix designs in the Work.
2.08 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch
not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
C. Do not add water to concrete mix at the jobsite unless approved by the architect/engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
B. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with
vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F. Separate slabs on grade and post-tensioned slabs from piping, conduit, and other vertical
penetrations and surfaces with joint filler.
G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure
to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface.
I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
K. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07920.
L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
O. Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, and tamping according to ACI 309R. Vibration of forms and reinforcing in not
permitted.
3.04 SCREEDS
A. Continuous intermediate screed strips set prior to concrete placement are required. Set screeds
and adjust as necessary to achieve proper slab elevation and thickness.
B. Screed floors level, maintaining the following minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor
Levelness values when measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155/ASTM E 1155M.
1. F(F): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 35; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 24.
2. F(L): Specified Overall Value (SOV) of 25; Minimum Localized Value (MLV) of 17.
3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed
setting system.
2. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set
quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.
3. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed.
D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as
indicated on Drawings.
3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03390.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.
D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C
143/C 143M.
3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect for each individual area.
E. Repair interior and exterior slab and wall cracks, holes, and voids exceeding 1/16 inch wide by
grinding crack to 1/8 inch wide and fill with epoxy bonding system. Grind smooth and flush with
adjacent surface.
1. Holes and Voids: Epoxy resin.
2. Cracks: Epoxy filler.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03380 - 1
SECTION 03380 – POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cast-in-place post-tensioned concrete slabs on grade.
B. Sheathing-covered tensioning tendons for unbonded system.
C. Design engineering for post-tensioned concrete slabs on grade.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
American Concrete Institute International; 2006.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2005.
D. ASTM A 416/A 416M - Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
Prestressed Concrete; 2005.
E. ASTM C 230/C 230M - Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement; 2003.
F. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2002.
G. CRSI (DA1) - CRSI Design Handbook; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2002.
H. PTI (MAN) - Post-Tensioning Manual; Post-Tensioning Institute; 2004, 3rd Edition Design
Method.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on concrete design mix, admixtures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, tendon sizes, spacing, placing sequence, supports and locations,
tendon supports, accessories, and calculated elongations.
C. Certificate: Certify that tendon strength characteristics meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tendons; stressing sequence and tension
loads established, elongation of tendon, and other pertinent data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
Section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene a pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene one week before starting work of this Section.
C. Discuss tendon locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03380 - 2
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate the work of system components not post-tensioned but associated with the work of
this Section.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Ambient Temperature for Grouting and Grout During Cure: 40 degrees F.
B. Maximum Grout Temperature (While Curing Under Pressure): 90 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Formwork: As specified in Section 03100.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Tendon Strands: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade determined by design requirements, seven-wire
stranded steel cable; stress-relieved (normal-relaxation) type; full length without splices;
weldless; uncoated.
B. Tendon Anchor: Type compatible with tendon, of strength not less than tendon.
C. Tendon Coupling: Type compatible with tendon, of strength equal to or greater than tendon after
attachment to tendons.
D. Supplementary Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03200.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit: Flex metal type, bright coated finish, sized to 200 percent of tendon cross sectional
area.
B. Tie Wire:
1. Minimum 16 gage annealed type.
C. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Size and shape for strength and support of reinforcement
during tendon location, installation, and placement of concrete.
D. Markers: Colored plastic.
E. Touch-up Primer: Corrosion resistive paint.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS AND MIX DESIGN
A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300.
B. Mix Design Requirements and Limitations and Proportioning Methods: As specified in Section
03300.
C. Provide concrete mix complying with requirements specified on Drawings.
2.05 GROUT
A. Non-Shrink Grout Fill for Tendon Cut-Off: ASTM C 1107, Grade B; pre-mixed compound
consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and manufacturer's specified water reducing and
plasticizing agents; non-staining, non-gas-forming, containing no chlorides; plastic consistency as
measured according to ASTM C 230; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of
7,000 psi in 28 days.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03380 - 3
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. An independent testing agency will conduct inspections and testing.
B. See Section 03300 for testing of concrete materials and mix designs.
C. Inspect and test stressing tendons before delivery to site for compliance with specified standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on
Drawings.
3.02 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Construct and support formwork in accordance with Section 03100.
B. Provide supports and working space for tensioning jacks.
C. Provide permanent tendon location markers.
D. Install anchorage devices.
3.03 TENDON PLACEMENT
A. Locate and position tendons. Protect from displacement. Protect from damage; replace if
damaged. Tape damaged sheathing and ends of sheathing at anchorage devices. No exposed
sheathing is permitted.
1. Maximum Distance from Indicated Position: 1/2 inch.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with Section 03300.
B. Verify tendons, anchors, seats, plates, and other items to be cast into concrete are placed and
secure.
C. See Section 03390 for curing requirements.
D. See Section 03300 for floor finishing requirements.
3.05 CONCRETE TOLERANCES
A. See Section 03100 for formwork construction tolerances.
B. See Section 03300 for floor flatness tolerance requirements.
3.06 TENSIONING
A. Confirm minimum required concrete strength with test cylinders prior to tensioning.
B. Measure prestressing force. Maintain jacking and tensioning records as work progresses.
C. Cut off excess tendon inside face of concrete after elongations have been verified by Engineer of
Record (EOR). Apply touch-up primer to cut end.
D. Re-tension tendons that do not have acceptable elongations as determined by the EOR.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE 03380 - 4
A. An independent testing agency will conduct field inspection and testing.
B. See Section 03300 for testing and inspection requirements.
3.08 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. Repair surface defects in accordance with Section 03300.
B. Request examination of concrete surfaces upon removal of forms.
C. Modify or repair concrete not conforming to required lines, detail, and elevations.
D. Modify or repair concrete not properly placed, resulting in honeycombing or other defects.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE CURING 03390 - 1
SECTION 03390 – CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
B. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004.
C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001.
D. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2003.
E. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on moisture-retaining sheet, including compatibility of different
products and limitations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound for Interior Slabs: ASTM C 309 Type 1 - Clear or translucent,
Class A.
B. Clear Sealer for Interior Slabs: ASTM C 309 Type 1 - Clear or translucent, Class A.
C. Contractor's Option - Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171.
1. Curing paper, regular.
2. Polyethylene film, white opaque, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in.
3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide.
D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.02 EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE CURING 03390 - 2
adhesive; secure at edges; maintain in place for not less than 4 days.
C. Absorptive Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down
over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days.
D. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions in one coat.
3.03 EXECUTION - VERTICAL SURFACES
A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 1
SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gypsum based concrete floor topping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for concrete floor topping.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other
components, and application.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other
conditions affecting concrete floor topping performance.
1. Place concrete floor topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of base
slabs are between 50 and 86 deg F (10 and 30 deg C).
B. Close areas to traffic during topping application and, after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. Gypsum Based Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of
gypsum based cement to which only water needs to be added at Project site.
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2,000 psi (69 MPa) minimum; ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 degrees F.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Sound deadening mat.
2.3 MIXING
A. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of concrete
floor topping.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
1. Fill substrate voids to prevent floor topping from leaking.
B. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1. Install floor topping reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply floor topping components according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 3
1. Close areas to traffic during floor topping application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum floor topping-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through floor topping.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate.
C. Lay sound deadening mat loose over substrate where indicated, smooth out and tape joints per
manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not make rigid attachments to the substrate.
D. Apply floor topping to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface.
2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
3. Screed surface with a straightedge to correct elevations.
E. Cure floor topping according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
F. Do not install floor coverings over floor topping until after time period recommended in writing
by manufacturer.
G. Remove and replace floor topping areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a “hollow” sound when tapped.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect floor topping from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
3.5 REPAIRS
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas.
END OF SECTION 03532
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
SECTION 05120 – STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members, support members and base plates.
B. Grouting under base plates.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005.
C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004.
D. ASTM A 6/A 6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2004b.
E. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005.
F. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2005.
G. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b.
H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a.
I. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2004a.
J. ASTM C 230/C 230M - Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement; 2003.
K. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink);
2005.
L. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2005a.
M. ASTM F 1554 – Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-KSI Yield
Strength; 1999.
N. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 1998.
O. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and
fasteners.
2. Connections not detailed.
3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
4. Design Criteria: Design and provide connections to support loads indicated on Drawings.
When loads are not specifically shown, provide connections to support loads required in the
General Notes on the structural Drawings.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
B. Design Calculations: Submit calculations for the following:
1. Connections not completely detailed or not indicated on Drawings.
2. Request for substitution of member sizes, material grades, or any modification of the
strength or configuration of the structural framing requested for the Contractor's
convenience, erection sequence, construction equipment, and materials.
3. Calculations: Conform to specified reference standards and clearly demonstrate applicability
for intended use.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength,destructive test analysis and non-destructive test
analysis.
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification
within the previous 12 months.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five
years of documented experience.
C. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years
of documented experience.
D. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Arizona.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
1. Provide seamless tube where tube is utilized as a sleeve.
E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium
carbon, plain.
F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
G. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections
requiring high-strength bolts.
H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
I. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B; pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, and manufacturer's specified water reducing and plasticizing agents; non-
staining, non-gas-forming, containing no chlorides; plastic consistency as measured according to
ASTM C 230; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi in 28 days.
J. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specifications.
B. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
C. Account for distortion and shrinkage due to welding processes as part of detailing and fabrication
procedures, both in the shop and in the field.
D. Provide connections as shown or noted on Drawings; if not shown or noted, provide Standard
Framed Beam Connections as shown in AISC (AMAN).
1. Combination of bolts and welds to transmit stress in the same faying surface of any
connection is not permitted.
2. Provide welded or bolted shop connectors using high-strength bolts.
3. Field Connections: Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are specifically
indicated.
a. Provide high-strength bolts for principal connections including all beam-to-beam and all
beam-to-column connections.
b. Provide high-strength or unfinished bolts for connections of secondary framing
members including girts and other framing members taking only nominal stresses.
E. Mark all members in protected, plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on
setting diagrams. Determine and mark the member work point at each end of columns in the shop
with a center punch or other acceptable means. Place marking on the flanges and web at each end
of columns. Define work point in accordance with AISC (AMAN).
F. Finish work in accordance with the approved shop drawings, true and free from twists, kinks,
buckles, open joints, and other defects.
G. Perform necessary cutting, fitting, and drilling to accommodate other trades, and secure correct
information from other trades before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling will not be
permitted on the site without approval of Architect.
H. Completely assemble and weld sub-assemblies with milled surfaces before milling.
I. Welding: Comply with AISC specifications and AWS standards. Provide 3/16 inch continuous
fillet welds, but not less than AISC minimum based on thickness of parts joined for welds not
specified.
J. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain the required lengths is not permitted without prior
approval of Architect, unless specifically detailed on Drawings.
K. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights specified are not readily available, secure
Architect's acceptance of suitable sizes in sufficient time to prevent delay due to substitutions.
L. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
M. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
2.03 FINISH
A. Clean and prepare surfaces before priming in accordance with SSPC SP-2.
B. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer paint at a rate to provide uniform dry film
thickness of 1.0 mils. Provide full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
C. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Shop Inspection: For all columns and 50 percent of beams and girders, examination of steel for
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
straightness and alignment, conformance to length tolerances, fissures, mill scale, and other
defects and deformities as described in ASTM A 6/A 6M, and examination of fabricated pieces
for conformity with approved shop drawings.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance
with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts", testing at
least 10 percent of bolts at each connection.
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges".
B. Align the various members forming a complete frame or structure after assembly and adjust
accurately before being fastened.
C. Measure and adjust for distortion and shrinkage of field welded assemblies as erection proceeds.
D. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe
condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
E. Clean bearing surfaces for base plates and roughen to improve bond. Clean bottom surface of
base plates.
F. Set base, bearing plates, and leveling plates level and at correct elevations. Temporarily support
on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Cut protruding
bearing pads or shims back flush with edge of base plates prior to grouting.
G. Field weld components indicated on Drawings.
H. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise
specifically permitted on Drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts".
I. Provide bolts of sufficient length to allow at least two full threads beyond nut after tightening.
J. Provide bearing-type connections.
K. Install lock nuts on slip connections and nick threads or tack weld nuts.
L. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
M. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
N. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
A. Comply with requirements of AISC, except as follows. Measure conformance at mean operating
temperature of 70 degrees F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection.
1. Column Deviation from Dimensioned Centerline: Plus or minus 0.125 inch, non-
cumulative.
2. Level and Plumb Each Member: Within 1:500.
3. Column Plumb: Within 1:500, but not to exceed 1.5 inch, non cumulative.
4. Column Top Elevation: Variation between all columns in any tier 0.5 inch maximum when
adjusted for axial shortening.
5. Horizontal Deviation of Horizontal Member from Dimensioned Working Centerline: Plus or
minus 0.063 inch.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests.
B. Inspect in accordance with AISC M016.
C. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance
with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts", testing at
least 10 percent of bolts at each connection.
D. Field Inspection: Assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and include:
1. Inspection of field welding.
2. Verification of proper fit and alignment.
3. Verification that Contractor's erection procedures adequately correct for distortion and
shrinkage in field welded assemblies and connections. Measure weld shrinkage at all groove
welded column splices. Submit reports of measurements to the Architect within two days of
completion of welding.
E. Welding Inspection: Assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and include:
1. Verification that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes
and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to specified requirements.
2. Verification that the approved welding procedure and the approved welding sequence are
followed without deviation, unless specific approval for change is obtained from the
Architect.
3. Visual inspection on 100 percent of fillet welds.
END OF SECTION
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 7 Section(s) "Atactic Poly Propylene (APP) Bituminous Membrane Roofing” for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a perimeter fire-
resistive joint system. 3. Division 7 Section –Fluid applied membrane air barriers. 4. Division 9 Section(s) "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies” for installation in wood- and metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for each product.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by
a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength
indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively,
per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Type IV, 25 psi.
2.2 FORMALDEHYDE-FREE GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced), Class C (faced
surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder).
D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
E. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.
2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150 or SC150. b. Gemco; Dome-Cap, R-150 or S-150.
2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Ceiling plenums.
b. Attic spaces. c. Where indicated.
C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers
are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units loosely laid according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 28 inches below exterior grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from exterior walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each
continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
C. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is
completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation
over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 15010 - PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15050 - BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 15100 - PIPING
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-1
SECTION 15010 - PLUMBING PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda and modifications and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and all other Division
Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. All preceding and following sections of this
specification division are applicable to the Mechanical Contractor, all sub-contractors, and all
material suppliers.
B. SCOPE OF WORK
1. This DIVISION requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning Mechanical systems,
and each element thereof, as specified or indicated on Drawings or reasonably inferred, including
every article, device or accessory reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as
indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the Work include materials,
labor, supervision, supplies, equipment, transportation, and utilities.
2. Refer to Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and all other contract documents and to
relevant equipment drawings and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces and make
all offsets required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members to facilitate concealing
piping and ductwork in the manner anticipated in the design.
C. SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS
1. The Engineer indicated in these specifications is Pearson Kent McKinley Raaf Engineers LLC. 8801
Ballentine, Suite 200, Overland Park, KS 66214, PHONE 913-492-2400, FAX 913-492-2437,
EMAIL admin@pkmreng.com.
2. Contractor, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean the Company that enters into contract
with the Owner to perform this section of work.
3. When a word, such as “proper”, “satisfactory”, “equivalent”, and “as directed”, is used, it requires the
Architect-Engineer’s review.
4. "PROVIDE" means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect, connect, test, and turn over to
Owner, complete and ready for regular operation, the particular Work referred to.
5. "INSTALL" means to join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up, or otherwise connect together before
testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation, the particular Work
referred to.
6. "FURNISH" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests,
accessories, and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application for the
particular Work referred to.
7. "WIRING" means the inclusion of all raceways, fittings, conductors, connectors, tape, junction and
outlet boxes, connections, splices, and all other items necessary and/or required in connection with
such Work.
8. "CONDUIT" means the inclusion of all fittings, hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.
9. "AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Architect/Engineer, or his representative.
10. "CONCEALED" means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or
within double partitions, or installed above hung ceilings.
D. QUALIFICATIONS
1. The contractors responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope
and magnitude within the last 3 years. The contractors shall employ an experienced, competent
and adequate work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times.
Unlicensed workers and general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and
quality work and workmanship required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and
practices. At all times the contractors shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal
guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be required to submit a statement of
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-2
qualifications upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure to be able to comply
with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid.
E. LOCAL CONDITIONS
1. The contractor shall visit the site and determine the existing local conditions affecting the work
required. Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be
considered a basis for granting additional compensation.
F. CONTRACT CHANGES
1. Changes or deviations from the contract documents; including those for extra or additional work
must be submitted in writing for review of Architect-Engineer. No verbal change orders will be
recognized.
G. LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES
1. Locations of equipment, piping and other mechanical work are indicated diagrammatically by the
mechanical drawings. The Contractor shall determine the exact locations on site, subject to
structural conditions, work of other Contractors, and access requirements for installation and
maintenance to approval of Architect-Engineer. Provide additional piping and ductwork offsets as
required at no additional cost.
2. Study and become familiar with the contract drawings of other trades and in particular the general
construction plans and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation.
Cooperate with other contractors and install work in such a way as to avoid interference with their
work. Minor deviations, not affecting design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be
permitted if reviewed prior to installation by Architect-Engineer.
3. Any pipe, ductwork, equipment, apparatus, appliance or other item interfering with proper
placement of other work as indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed,
relocated and reconnected without extra cost. Damage to other work caused by this Contractor, the
Subcontractor, or workers shall be restored as specified for new work.
4. Do not scale mechanical and electrical drawings for dimensions. Contractor shall accurately layout
work from the dimensions indicted on the Architectural drawings unless they are found to be in
error.
H. PERFORMANCE
1. Final acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus
and appliances operate satisfactorily as designed and intended. Work shall include required
adjustment of systems and control equipment installed under this specification division.
2. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect-Engineer the quality of materials, equipment,
workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of
one year from and after completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner.
I. WARRANTY
1. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect-Engineer that upon notice from them within a
one year warranty period following date of acceptance, that all defects that have appeared in
materials and/or workmanship, will be promptly corrected to original condition required by contract
documents at Contractor’s expense.
2. The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements
required by law or by these specifications.
J. ALTERNATES
1. Refer to General Requirements for descriptions of any alternates that may be included.
K. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
1. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for Contractor to use his ingenuity
and abilities to perform the work to his and the Owner’s best advantage, and to permit maximum
competition in bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-3
2. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and
without damage.
3. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming one or more
manufacturer’s brand, model, catalog number and/or other identification. The first named
manufacturer or product is used as the basis for design; other manufacturers named must furnish
products consistent with specifications of first named product as determined by Engineer. Base bid
proposal shall be based only on materials and equipment by manufacturers named, except as
hereinafter provided.
4. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality,
adequate in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for
review prior to procurement.
5. Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in
construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer
whose decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall
be no larger than space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance.
Requests must be accompanied by two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including
manufacturer’s name, model and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions,
operating characteristics and any other information needed for comparison.
6. If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid
Specifications they shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10)
ten calendar days prior to bid date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option.
Equivalents will ONLY be considered approved when listed by addendum.
7. In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such bid the cost of
altering other elements of this project, including adjustments in mechanical or electrical service
requirements necessary to accommodate such substitution.
8. Within 10 working days after bids are received, the apparent low bidder shall submit to the
Architect-Engineer for approval, three copies of a list of all major items of equipment they intend to
provide. Within 30 working days after award of Contract, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for
equipment and materials to be incorporated in work, for Architect-Engineer review. Where 30-day
limit is insufficient for preparation of detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies,
Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed
shop drawings will be submitted along with manufacturer’s certification that order was placed within
30 working day limit.
L. ELECTRONIC PLAN FILES
1. Electronic files of the contract documents may be available from the Engineer to successful bidders
and manufacturers for a fee of $50 per sheet, $100 minimum and $25 email/shipping charge. A
release of liability form will be required along with payment prior to release of files.
M. OPENINGS, ACCESS PANELS AND SLEEVES
1. This Contractor shall include the installation of all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings
required to install this work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings.
Sleeves shall be installed for all pipes passing through structural slabs and walls. Contractor shall
set and verify the location of sleeves that pass through beams, as shown on structural plans. All
floor and wall penetrations shall be sealed to meet fire-rating requirements.
2. All penetrations through interior or exterior and rated or non-rated walls and floors shall be
appropriately sealed prevent entry and movement of rodents and insects. Contractor shall
coordinate their work with all other trades.
N. ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Contractor shall consult all Architectural Drawings and specifications in their entirety incorporating
and certifying all millwork, furniture, and equipment rough-in including utility characteristics such as
voltage, phase, amperage, pipe sizes, duct sizes, including height, location and orientation. Shop
drawings incorporating these requirements should be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-4
installation or rough in.
O. EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK
1. Provide mechanical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every
device and accessory necessary for proper operation and completion of mechanical systems. In no
case will claims for “Extra Work” be allowed for work about which Contractor could have been
informed before bids were taken.
2. Contractor shall become familiar with equipment provided by other contractors that require
mechanical connections and controls.
3. Electrical work required to install and control mechanical equipment, which is not shown on plans or
specified under Division 16, shall be included in Contractor’s base bid proposal.
4. All automatic temperature control devices shall be mounted as indicated in automatic temperature
control section of specifications.
5. The cost of larger wiring, conduit, control and protective devices resulting from installation of
equipment which was not used for basis of design as outlined in specifications shall be paid for by
Mechanical Contractor at no cost to Owner or Architect-Engineer.
6. Contractor shall be responsible for providing supervision to Electrical Contractor to insure that
required connections, interlocking and interconnection of mechanical and electrical equipment are
made to attain intended control sequences and system operation.
7. Furnish four complete sets of electrical wiring diagrams to Architect-Engineer to be included in the
maintenance manuals and three complete sets to Electrical Contractor. Diagrams shall show
factory and field wiring of components and controls. Control devices and field wiring to be provided
by Electrical Contractor shall be clearly indicated by notation and drawing symbols on wiring
diagrams.
8. Contractor shall obtain complete electrical data on mechanical shop drawings and shall list this data
on an approved form that shall be presented monthly or on request, to Electrical Contractor. Data
shall be complete with wiring diagrams received to date and shall contain necessary data on
electrical components of mechanical equipment such as HP, voltage, amperes, watts, locked rotor
current to allow Electrical Contractor to order electrical equipment required in his contract.
P. WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT
1. Consult Division 16 of specifications for work to be provided by Electrical Contractor in conjunction
with installation of mechanical equipment.
Q. CODES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. Provide Work in accordance with applicable codes, rules and regulations of Local and State,
Federal Governments and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
2. Conform to latest editions and supplements of following codes, standards or recommended
practices.
R. SAFETY CODES:
1. National Electrical Safety Code Handbook H30 - National Bureau of Standards.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHA) - Department of Labor.
S. NATIONAL FIRE CODES:
1. NFPA No. 13 Standard for the installation of Sprinkler Systems
2. NFPA No. 54 Gas Appliance & Gas Piping Installation
3. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code
4. NFPA No. 89M Clearances, Heat Producing Appliances
5. NFPA No. 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
6. NFPA No. 91 Blower & Exhaust System
7. NFPA No. 204 Smoke & Heating Vent Guide
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-5
T. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC:
1. All materials, equipment and component parts of equipment shall bear UL labels whenever such
devices are listed by UL.
U. MISCELLANEOUS CODES:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Handicapped Accessibility
2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
V. STANDARDS
1. Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standard. Should any work indicated be
sub-standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall
promptly notify Architect-Engineer in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes
can be made. However, if the Contractor proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any
ordinances, laws, rules, and regulations, Contractor shall thereby have assumed full responsibility
for and shall bear all costs required to correct non-complying work.
W. PERMITS/FEES
1. The Contractor shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by
governmental ordinances, laws, rules or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and
inspection certificates and submit two copies to Architect-Engineer with request for final inspection.
2. The Contractor shall include in their base bid any fees or charges by the local utility providers to
establish new services to the structure. Coordinate with the utility suppliers to verify exactly which
part of the work required for the new utility service, is to be performed by the contractor and which
part will be supplied by the utility company.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. COORDINATION
1. Certain materials will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain
these requirements.
2. Carefully check space requirements with other trades and the physical confines of the area to
insure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto including finished suspended
ceilings and the spaces within the existing building. Make modifications thereto as required and
approved.
3. Transmit to other trades all information required for work to be provided under their respective
Sections in ample time for installation.
4. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that
all trades have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary
connections and equipment. Identify all items of work that require access so that the ceiling trade
will know where to install access doors and panels.
5. Coordinate, project and schedule work with other trades in accordance with the construction
sequence.
6. The Drawings show only the general run of piping and ductwork and approximate location of
outlets. Any significant changes in location of items necessary in order to meet field conditions shall
be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect/Engineer and receive his approval before
such alterations are made. All such modifications shall be made without additional cost to the
Owner.
7. Adjust location of piping, ductwork, etc. to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered.
Determine the exact route and location of each item prior to fabrication.
7.1. Right-of-Way:
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-6
7.1.1. Lines that pitch have the right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example: steam,
condensate, and plumbing drains normally have right-of way. Lines whose elevations
cannot be changed to have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.
7.1.2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction in raceways as required to maintain
proper headroom in pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.
8. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional Detail Drawings to scale similar to
that of the bidding Drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the same size as Contract Drawings.
With these layouts, coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Such detailed work to be
clearly identified on the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit for review Drawings
clearly showing the work and its relation to the work of other trades before commencing shop
fabrication or erection in the field.
9. Coordinate with the local Utility Companies to their requirements for service connections and
provide all necessary materials, labor and testing.
10. Coordinate with contractors for work under other Divisions of this specification for all work
necessary to accomplish this contractor's work.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of six sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment.
Architect-Engineer will retain three sets.
2. Contractor shall submit two sets of prints of all fabrication drawings. Cost of drawing preparation,
printing and distribution shall be paid for by the contractor and included in his base bid.
3. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment,
capacities, controls, fitting sizes, etc. that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with
applicable section and sheet number of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does
not appear in the specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base
specifications or specified equivalent, mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change
order number or letters of authorization. Each submittal shall contain at least two sets of original
catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear the equipment manufacturer’s name and address. All
shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate UL approval on submittal.
4. Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawings
requirements before forwarding submittals to the Architect-Engineer for their review. All shop
drawings submitted to Architect-Engineer shall bear contractor’s approval stamp that shall indicate
that Contractor has reviewed submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing
requirements. Contractor’s submittal review shall specifically check for but not be limited to the
following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to space allowed; electrical characteristics,
provisions for supply, return and drainage connections to building systems. All shop drawings not
meeting Contractor’s approval shall be returned to their supplier for re-submittal.
5. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect-Engineer without
Contractor’s approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a
result of the Contractor’s review.
6. The shop drawing submittal dates shall be at least as early as required to support the project
schedule and shall also allow for two weeks Architect-Engineer review time plus mailing time plus a
duplication of this time for re-submittal if required. Submittal of all shop drawings as soon as
possible before construction starts is preferred. Submit the number of shop drawings required by
the General Conditions but not less than 6 copies. All shop drawings submitted shall contain the
following: The project name, the applicable specification section and paragraph, the submittal date,
the Contractor's stamp which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been checked by the
Contractor, comply with the drawings and specifications and have been coordinated with other
trades. Submittals not so identified will be returned without action for re-submittal.
7. The Architect's-Engineer’s checking and subsequent approval of such drawings, schedules,
literature, or illustrations shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from
Drawings or Specifications unless he has, in writing, called the Architect's-Engineer’s attention to
such deviations at the time of submission, and secured their written approval; nor shall it relieve the
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-7
contractor from responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, size of members, or omissions of
components for fittings; or for coordinating items with actual building conditions and adjacent work.
8. Any corrections or modifications made by the Architect-Engineer shall be deemed acceptable to the
Contractor at no change in price unless written notice is received by the Architect-Engineer prior to
the performance of any work incorporating such corrections or modifications.
9. Shop drawings that require re-submission shall have the items that were revised "flagged" or in
some other manner marked to call attention to what has been changed.
10. Before submitting shop drawings and material lists, verify that all equipment submitted is mutually
compatible and suitable for the intended use. Verify that all equipment will fit the available space
and allow ample room for maintenance. If the size of equipment furnished makes necessary any
change in location, or configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed layout.
11. Architect-Engineer’s review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
deviations from drawings and specifications unless the Architect-Engineer has specifically approved
such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors in shop
drawings. No work shall be fabricated until Architect-Engineer’s review has been obtained. Any
time delay caused by correcting and re-submitting shop drawings will be the Contractor’s
responsibility.
C. SUBMITTALS
1. Contractor shall provide the following submittal sections that apply to this project:
1.1. SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS:
1.1.1. Test methods and pressures
1.1.2. Sterilization of domestic water systems
1.1.3. Piping, and fittings
1.2. SECTION 15100 - PIPING:
1.2.1. Piping specialties
1.2.2. Piping and equipment insulation
1.3. SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM:
1.3.1. Automatic fire sprinkler system products
1.4. SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING:
1.4.1. Plumbing Specialties
D. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS (O & M MANUALS)
1. Submit with shop drawings of equipment, four copies of installation, operating, maintenance
instructions, and parts lists for equipment provided. Equipment manufacturer shall prepare
instructions.
2. Keep in safe place, keys and wrenches furnished with the equipment provided under this contract.
Present to the Owner and obtain a receipt for them upon completion of project.
3. Prepare a complete brochure, covering systems and equipment provided and installed under this
contract. Submit brochures to Architect-Engineer for review before delivery to Owner. Brochures
shall contain following:
4. Certified equipment drawings/or catalog data with equipment provided clearly marked as outlined
above.
5. Complete installation, operating, maintenance instructions and parts lists for each item of
equipment.
6. Special emergency operating instructions with a list of service organizations (including addresses
and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency service to various parts of mechanical
system.
7. Record Set Drawings:
7.1. The Contractor shall mark up a set of contract documents during construction all changes
and deviations including change orders. These will be delivered to Architect-Engineer at the
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-8
end of the project. After the originals are changed to reflect the blue line set, a copy shall be
included in the brochure.
8. Provide brochures bound in three-ring binders with metal hinge. Reinforce binding edge of each
sheet of loose-leaf type brochure to prevent tearing from continued usage. Clearly print on label
insert of each brochure:
8.1. Project name and address.
8.2. Section of work covered by brochure, i.e., “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning”, and
“Plumbing”, etc.
E. RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. A. During construction, keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on
Drawings and that which is actually installed. Keep this record set of prints at the job site for review
by the Architect/Engineer.
2. Upon completion of the installation and acceptance by the owner, transfer all record drawing
information to one neat and legible set of prints. Then deliver them to the Architect/Engineer for
transmittal to the Owner.
3. Media shall be a high quality presentation type paper. Blueprints or other media which fade shall not
be used.
F. CLEANING UP
1. Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc., resulting from the
installation of his work. Contractor shall remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc.,
and keep the premises clean.
2. Contractor shall clean up all ductwork and equipment at the completion of the project.
3. All equipment, cabinets and enclosures shall be thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to energizing
equipment and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be opened for observation by the
Architect/Engineer as required.
G. WATERPROOFING
1. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room
floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, perform it prior to the
waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Architect/Engineer and
obtain written permission before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such
penetration is shown on the Drawings.
2. If Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed, he shall restore
the waterproof integrity of that surface as directed by the Architect/Engineer at his own expense
H. CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. Contractor shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein
specified. Do not cut or drill through structural members including wall, floors, roofs, and supporting
structure, without the Architect’s and Structural Engineer’s approval and in a manner approved by
them.
2. Make openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer
for this work will not be permitted.
3. Patching shall be by the contractors of the particular trade involved and shall meet approval of
Architect-Engineer. Damage to building finishes, caused by installation of mechanical work shall be
repaired at Mechanical Contractor’s expense to approval of Architect-Engineer.
I. SETTING, ADJUSTMENT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
1. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment
level on adequate foundation and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown, specified or
required by manufacturers in installation instructions. Level, shim and grout equipment bases as
recommended by manufacturer. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and belts according to
manufacturer's instructions.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PLUMBING PROVISIONS 15010-9
2. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field alignment shall be repaired or
replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
3. Floor or pad mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include
anchor fastening in all cases.
4. Provide floor or slab mounted equipment with 3-1/2” high concrete bases unless specified
otherwise. Mechanical contractor shall form all pads; General contractor shall provide and place all
concrete and reinforcing for said pads. Individual concrete pad shall be no less than 4” wider and 4”
longer than equipment, and shall extend no less than 2” from each side of equipment.
5. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level
with suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with best-recognized practice.
Verify that structural members of buildings are adequate to support equipment and unless otherwise
indicated on plans or specified, arrange for their inclusion and attachment to building structure.
Provide hangers with vibration isolators.
6. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports together with total weights of mounted equipment
to Architect-Engineer for review before proceeding with fabrication or installation.
J. START-UP, CHANGEOVER, TRAINING AND OPERATIONAL CHECK
1. Contractor shall perform the initial start-up of the systems and equipment and shall provide
necessary supervision and labor to make the first seasonal changeover of systems. Personnel
qualified to start-up and service this equipment, including manufacturer's technicians, and the
Owner’s operating personnel shall be present during these operations.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for training Owner’s operating personnel to operate and maintain
the systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner’s personnel
listing the date, subject covered, instructors name, names of Owner’s personnel attending and total
hours of instruction given each individual.
K. FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
1. At final construction review, each respective Contractor and major subcontractors shall be present
or shall be represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by
the Architect-Engineer, that the work complies with the purpose and intent of the contract
documents. Respective Contractor shall provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for
such demonstrations and tests.
END OF SECTION 15010
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1
SECTION 15050 - BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 15010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. TESTING PROCEDURES FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
1. Test all lines and systems before they are insulated, painted or concealed by construction or
backfilling. Provide fuel, water, electricity, materials, labor and equipment required for tests.
2. Where entire system cannot be tested before concealment, test system in sections. Verify that
system components are rated for maximum test pressures to be applied. Where specified test
pressures exceed component ratings, remove or isolate components from system during tests.
Upon completion, each system shall be tested as an entire system.
3. Repair or replace defects, leaks and material failures revealed by tests and then retest until
satisfactory. Make repairs with new materials.
4. All systems shall hold scheduled test pressures for specified time without loss of initial test
pressure.
5. Upon completion of testing submit five copies of a typewritten report to A/E. Report shall list
systems tested, test methods, test pressures, holding time and all failures with corrective action
taken.
6. For test pressure schedules see Section 15100 of this specification.
B. TEST METHODS AND PRESSURES
1. Test methods and pressures shall be as follows:
1.1. Hydrostatic Test (Closed Systems):
1.1.1. Hydrostatic test shall be performed using clean unused domestic water. Test pressures
shall be as scheduled for system or 150% of operating pressure where not specified.
1.2. Hydrostatic Test (Open System):
1.2.1. Test entire system with 10-foot head of water. Where system is tested in sections each
joint in building except uppermost 10 feet of system shall be submitted to at least 10-foot
head of water. Water shall be held in system for 15 minutes before inspection starts.
System shall hold test pressure without leaks.
1.3. Pneumatic Test:
1.3.1. Test entire system with compressed air. Systems operating above 25 PSI shall be tested
at 75 PSI or 15% of operating pressure or whichever is greater.
1.3.2. Allow at least 1 hour after test pressure has been applied before making initial test.
1.3.3. Curing test, completely isolate entire system from compressor or other sources of air
pressure.
1.4. Pressure Relief and Safety Valve:
1.4.1. Before installation, test pressure temperature, and safety relief valves to confirm relief
settings comply with specifications.
1.4.2. Tag items that pass test with date of test, observed relief pressure setting and inspector’s
signature.
END OF SECTION 15050
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-1
SECTION 15100 - PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 15010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. PIPING MATERIALS
1. Piping used throughout project shall conform to the following specifications. Piping shall be plainly
marked with manufacturers name and weight. See piping material schedule at end of this Section
for materials to be used for each piping system.
1.1. Carbon Steel Pipe (1/8” thru 2”):
1.1.1. Provide seamless carbon steel conforming to ASTM specification A-106.
1.1.2. Pipe joints shall be threaded conforming to ANSI Standard B2.1.
1.1.3. Pipe by Armco, Jones, Laughlin Steel Corp., Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co., or United
States Steel.
1.2. Carbon Steel Pipe (2-1/2” and above):
1.2.1. Provide electric resistance welded carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM Specification
A-53.
1.2.2. Pipe ends shall be beveled for welding.
1.2.3. Pipe by Armco, Jones and Laughlin Steel Corp., Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co., or
United States Steel.
1.3. Copper Tube:
1.3.1. Provide hard temper copper water tube conforming to requirements of current ASTM
Specification B-88. Tubing shall be Type K, L, or M as listed in schedule. Tubing joints
shall be soldered or brazed. See schedule for joining method to be used.
1.3.2. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, Chase, Mueller or Revere Copper.
1.4. PEX Hot and Cold Domestic Water Piping (1/2” thru 3/4”):
1.4.1. Tubing shall be made of cross-linked high density polyethylene. The cross-linking
method shall be accomplished by grafting organosilane molecules onto the base
polyethylene chain by use of a catalyst blended with the resin before extrusion and then
completed in a steam process. The oxygen barrier layer on the outside of the tubing shall
be made of ethylene vinyl alcohol (EVOH). EVOH is highly resistant to the passage of
oxygen.
1.4.2. All pipe shall conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards 14 and 61.
1.4.3. The PEX shall be made in copper tube size dimensions (CTS-OD) with a standard
dimension ratio (SDR) of 9 controlling the wall thickness and shall conform to ASTM F
876 and F 877.
1.4.4. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Pipe to be intended for hot and cold water distribution systems.
1.4.5. Support piping per manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.4.6. Pipe by Nibco or equal.
1.5. CPVC Hot and Cold Domestic Water Piping (1/2” thru 2”):
1.5.1. All pipe to be manufactured from CPVC compound with a cell class of 24448 as per
ASTM D 1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards 14 and
61.
1.5.2. Pipe to be FlowGuard Gold® CPVC Copper Tube Size manufactured to standard
dimension ratio (SDR) 11 and shall conform to ASTM D 2846.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-2
1.5.3. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Buried pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F 1668. Solvent cement shall
conform to ASTM F 493 and system may be installed with approved one-step cement.
Pipe to be intended for hot and cold water distribution systems.
1.5.4. Support piping per manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.5.5. Pipe by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
1.6. CPVC Hot and Cold Domestic Water Piping (2”-6”)
1.6.1. All pipe to be manufactured from CPVC compound with a cell class of 24448 as per
ASTM D 1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards 14 and
61.
1.6.2. Pipe to be Corzan CPVC Schedule 80 IPS Pipe shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ASTM F441 in Schedule 80.
1.6.3. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Pipe to be intended for hot and cold water distribution systems.
1.6.4. Support piping per manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.6.5. Pipe by Nibco, IPEX or equal.
1.7. Copper Tube Type ACR:
1.7.1. Provide hard temper nitrogenized copper refrigerant tube conforming to requirements of
current ASTM B-88. Tubes shall be Type L or K as listed in schedule.
1.7.2. Tubing joints shall be brazed.
1.7.3. Pipe by Anaconda, Cerro, or Mueller.
1.8. Polyethylene Pipe:
1.8.1. Provide polyethylene pipe for gas service conforming to ASTM D-1248. Pipe shall be UV
stabilized. SDR of 11.
1.8.2. Pipe by Driscopipe or equal.
1.9. ABS Schedule 40 Foam Core DWV Pipe:
1.9.1. Pipe shall be manufactured from ABS compound with a cell class of 42222 for pipe as
per ASTM D 3965 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 14.
Pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM F 628
1.9.2. Pipe by Charlotte Pipe, Genova, Crestline or equal.
1.10. Polyvinyl Chloride Drain Waste Pipe:
1.10.1. Provide Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride plastic drain waste and vent pipe conforming to
ASTM D2665-88. Joints shall be properly cleaned, primed and glued.
1.10.2. Pipe by Charlot, Genova, Crestline or equal.
B. PIPING FITTINGS
1. Piping fitting used throughout project shall be proper type for installation method used and shall be
compatible with piping system material. Fittings listed in piping material schedule shall conform to
the following specifications:
1.1. Carbon Steel Welding Fittings:
1.1.1. Provide carbon low alloy seamless steel welding fittings conforming to current ANSI
Standard B16.9 and ASTM Specification A234.
1.1.2. Fittings by Grinnell, Midwest or Tube Turn.
2. Branch Connection Welding Fittings:
2.1. Provide carbon steel weldolet fittings conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9, B16.11, B31.1.0
and ASTM specification A105, Grade 11.
2.2. Fittings by Bonney Forge.
3. Branch Connection, Welding to Screwed Fitting:
3.1. Provide carbon steel threadolet fitting conforming to ANSI Standards B16.9, B16.11, B31.1,
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-3
and ASTM Specification A105, Grade 11.
3.2. Fittings by Bonney Forge.
4. Malleable Iron Screwed Fittings:
4.1. Provide screwed malleable iron fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.3, and ASTM
Specification A-47 grade 32510.
4.2. Fittings by Crane, Grinnell or Stockham.
5. Wrought Copper Fittings:
5.1. Provide wrought solder joint copper tube fitting conforming to ANSI Standard B16.22
5.2. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.
6. Cast Bronze Fittings:
6.1. Provide cast bronze solder joint fittings conforming to ANSI Standard B16.18.
6.2. Fittings by Anaconda, Chase or Nibco.
7. CPVC Hot and Cold Domestic Water Fittings (1/2”-2”):
7.1.1. All fittings to be manufactured from CPVC compound with a cell class of 23447 for fittings
as per ASTM D 1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards
14 and 61.
7.1.2. Fittings to be FlowGuard Gold® CPVC Copper Tube Size manufactured to standard
dimension ratio (SDR) 11 and shall conform to ASTM D 2846. Transition fittings to have
brass male or female connections with integral CPVC socket connections.
7.1.3. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements.
Buried pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F 1668. Solvent cement shall
conform to ASTM F 493 and system may be installed with approved one-step cement.
Fittings to be intended for hot and cold water distribution systems.
7.1.4. Fittings by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
8. CPVC Hot and Cold Domestic Water Piping (2”-6”)
8.1.1. All fittings to be manufactured from CPVC compound with a cell class of 24448 as per
ASTM D 1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standards 14 and
61.
8.1.2. Fittings to be Corzan CPVC Schedule 80 IPS and shall meet or exceed the requirements
of ASTM F441 in Schedule 80.
8.1.3. All fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable code requirements. Pipe to be intended
for hot and cold water distribution systems.
8.1.4. Support piping per manufacturer’s recommendations.
8.1.5. Fittings by Nibco, IPEX or equal.
9. ABS Schedule 40 Foam Core DWV Fittings:
9.1. Fittings shall be manufactured from ABS compound with a cell class of 32222 for fittings as
per ASTM D 3965 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 14.
Fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2661.
9.2. Fittings by Charlotte Pipe, Spears, Lasco or equal.
10. PVC Fittings:
10.1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. PVC Non-pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to
ASTM D 2665.
10.2. Equivalents: Spears, Lasco or equal.
C. PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
1. Provide necessary materials and accessories for installation of insulation for plumbing and
mechanical systems as specified and/or detailed on drawings insulation type, jacket, and thickness
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-4
for specific piping systems or equipment shall be as listed in insulation schedule. Provide insulation
materials manufactured by Armstrong Industries, Dow Chemical, Schuller, Knauf Fiberglass or
Owens-Corning Fiberglas.
2. Insulation, except where specified otherwise, shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings
as rested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 procedures not exceeding:
FLAME SPREAD 25
SMOKE DEVELOPED 50
FUEL CONTRIBUTED 50
3. Provide insulation accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tape and glass fabric with
same component ratings as listed above. Products or their shipping cartons shall bear label
indicating their flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. Use of water soluble treatments such
as corn paste or wheat paste is prohibited. This does not exclude approved lagging adhesives.
4. Install insulation over clean dry surfaces with joints firmly butted together. Insulation at equipment,
flanges, fittings, etc. shall have straight edges with box type joints with corner beads as required.
Where plumbing and heating insulation terminates at equipment or unions, taper insulation at 30
degree angle to pipe with one coat finishing cement and finish same as fittings. Total insulation
system shall have neat smooth appearance with no wrinkles, or folds in jackets, joint strips or fitting
covers.
5. Undamaged insulation systems on cold surface piping and equipment shall perform their intended
functions as vapor barriers and thermal insulation without premature deterioration of insulation or
vapor barrier. Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to provide insulation systems with
continuous unbroken vapor barriers.
6. Where glass fabric is specified in the following insulation methods provide resin impregnated white
open weave glass fabric with 10/20 thread count. Provide glass cloth similar to Alpha Martex
wettable glass cloth.
7. Abbreviations for manufacturers of adhesive, mastics and coating specified shall be C.M. for
Chicago Mastic Company and B.F. for Benjamin Foster Company.
8. Insulation of removable heads, manholes access covers, etc., shall be fabricated to allow removal
without damage to insulation. Provide removable units with vapor-proof cover fabricated to be
sealed to equipment vapor barrier.
9. Insulation failing to meet workmanship and appearance standards shall be replaced with an
acceptable installation before final acceptance of project will be given. Insulation failing to meet
performance requirements of this specification for a period of one year after date of final acceptance
or through one heating season and one cooling season, whichever is longer shall be replaced with
an acceptable installation. All costs to correct insulation deficiencies and costs to repair damages
to other work shall be at Mechanical Contractors expense at no cost to owner.
D. INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATION METHODS (PIPING)
1. Pipe insulation by type shall be as follows:
1.1. TYPE P1
1.1.1. Insulation for hot and cold surface piping systems with -20 degrees F to +850 degrees F
operating range shall be by Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Schuller, or Knauf ASJ/SSL-11,
4.2 lb. density pipe insulation with white fire retardant ASJ jacket and self-sealing lap.
Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .23 BTU/Hr. at 75 degrees F mean
temperature. Seal longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips with C.M. No. 17-465 or B.F.
No. 85-75 vapor barrier adhesive. Insulate valves and fittings as follows:
1.1.2. Insulate exposed and concealed valves and fittings with 2” thick glass fiberglass inserts
or blankets. Cover fittings with Zeston Products PVC fitting covers or approved equal.
PVC fitting covers shall be secured with mechanical fasteners such as tacks or staples
for temperatures above 75 degrees F. For cold service all joints shall be sealed with
vapor barrier adhesive or by pressure sensitive vapor barrier vinyl tape.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-5
1.2. TYPE P2
1.2.1. AP Armaflex SS Pipe Insulation snapped over piping already connected. Fitting covers
are fabricated from miter-cut tubes. Butt joints are to be sealed with Armaflex 520
Adhesive. 520 Adhesives are contact adhesives; therefore, both surfaces to be joined
are coated with adhesive.
1.2.2. AP Armaflex SS is designed for installation above ground. Outdoors, a weather-resistant
WB Armaflex Finish protective finish is to be applied.
1.2.3. Armaflex insulation products must be installed according to "Installation of Armaflex
Insulations " brochure. Proper installation is required to assure Armaflex insulation
performance. AP Armaflex SS must be protected from direct sunlight exposure and
weather elements when installed outdoors with water-resistant jacketing or WB Armaflex
Finish.
1.2.4. Average thermal conductivity shall not exceed .27 BTU/Hr. at 75 degrees F mean
temperature.
E. INSULATION MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS METHODS (HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS,
GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, ETC.)
1. Insulation materials and application methods for piping hangers supports, anchors, guides
expansion joints, etc., shall be as follows:
1.1. Insulate hangers and supports from direct contact with cold or hot surfaces (-120oF to 450oF)
with “Buckaroos Inc.” or approved equal pipe insulation support system.
1.2. The length of the “Buckaroo” insulation support same as the pipe insulation thickness.
Provide ASJ type discs to reestablish vapor barrier.
F. INSULATION SCHEDULE
INSULATION SERVICE SIZE TYPE THICKNESS JACKET
Copper Domestic Cold Water ½” thru 1-1/4” P2 ½” ASJ
Copper Domestic Cold Water 1-1/2” and up P2 1” ASJ
Domestic Hot Water/Return All P2 1” ASJ
Domestic 140°F Hot Water All P1 1” ASJ
Drinking Fount. Drain All Sizes P2 1” ASJ
*Refrigerant Suction All Sizes P2 1” None
G. LAVATORIES AND SINK INSULATION
1. Insulate all exposed hot, cold and waste piping associated with lavatories and sinks with Truebro
“Handi Lav-Guard” insulation kit model no. 102. Equivalent by Brocar Products Inc. or Proto P-trap
and valve covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. PIPING INSTALLATION
1. Piping systems materials and installation shall conform to the following standards and codes.
1.1. System: Natural Gas Piping
1.1.1. Code: ANSI Standard B31.12 “Fuel Gas Piping”
2. No piping containing water shall be located in areas subject to freezing temperatures, including:
unheated attics, unheated plenums, chases wall spaces or cavities within exterior walls, under
slabs, or in concrete.
3. Pipe sizes indicated on plans and as specified refer to nominal size in inches, unless otherwise
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-6
indicated. Pipes are sized to nearest ½”. In no case shall piping smaller than size specified be
used.
4. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for proper location of pipe sleeves, hangers, supports,
and inserts. Install hangers, supports, inserts, etc., as recommended by manufacturer and as
specified and detailed on drawings.
5. Verify construction types and provide proper hangers, inserts and supports for construction used.
Install inserts, hangers and supports in accordance with manufacturers load ratings and provide for
thermal expansion of piping without exceeding allowable stress on piping or supports. Provide solid
type hangers and supports where pipe travel exceeds manufacturer’s recommendations for fixed
hanger and supports.
6. Install piping parallel with building lines and parallel with other piping to obtain a neat and orderly
appearance of piping system. Secure piping with approved anchors and provide guides where
required to insure proper direction of piping expansion. Piping shall be installed so that allowable
stress for piping, valves and fittings used are not exceeded during normal operation or testing of
piping system.
7. Install piping so that systems can be completely drained. Provide piping systems with valve drain
connections at all low pipe and ahead of all sectionalizing valves whether shown on plans or not.
Drain lines shall be ¾”.
8. Drain valves on closed piping systems such as chilled water system shall have lock shields and
plugged or capped outlets to protect system from inadvertent drainage.
9. Pitch all piping and where possible make connections from horizontal piping so that air can be
properly vented from system. Provide air vents as specified at all system high points and at drop in
piping in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers where necessary to avoid air pockets in
horizontal piping.
10. Provide unions or flanged joints in each pipe line preceding connections to equipment to allow
removal for repair or replacement. Provide all screwed and control valves with unions adjacent to
each piping connection. Provide screwed end valves with union adjacent to valve unless valve can
be otherwise easily removed from line.
11. Fittings pressures and temperature ratings shall be equal to or exceed maximum operating
temperature and working pressure of piping system. No mitered or field fabricated pipe fittings will
be permitted.
12. All pipe threads shall meet ANSI Standard B2.1 for taper pipe threads. Lubricate pipe threads with
Teflon thread sealant and lubricating compound applied full strength. Powdered or made-up
compound will not be permitted. Pipe thread compound shall be applied only to male pipe threads.
13. Brazed socket type joints shall be made with suitable brazing alloys. Minimum socket depth shall
be sufficient for intended service. Brazing alloy shall be end fed into socket, and shall fill completely
annular clearance between socket and pipe or tube. Brazed joints depending solely upon a fillet
rather than a socket type joint will not be acceptable.
14. Soft soldered socket type joints shall be made with sill-floss or 95-5 tin-antimony solder as required
by temperature and pressure rating of piping system. Soldered socket-type joints shall be limited to
systems containing non-flammable and non-toxic fluids. Soldered socket-type joints shall not be
used on piping systems subject to shock vibration. Soldered joints depending solely upon a fillet
rather than a socket-type joint will not be acceptable.
15. Make changes in piping size and direction with approved factory made fittings. Provide fittings
suitable for at least 125 PSI working pressure or of pressure rating required for maximum working
pressure of system whichever is greater.
B. PIPING SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, SLEEVES AND SEALS
1. Furnish proper type and size pipe sleeves to General Contractor for installation in concrete or
masonry walls or floors. Sleeves are not required for supply and waste piping through wall
supporting plumbing fixtures or for cast iron soil pipe passing through concrete slab or grade except
where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-7
2. Mechanical Contractor shall supervise installation of sleeves to insure proper location and
installation.
3. Each sleeve shall be continuous through wall floor or roof and shall be cut flush on each side except
where indicated otherwise. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural member except where
indicated or approved.
4. Sleeves passing through above grade floors subject to flooding such as toilet rooms, bathrooms,
equipment rooms and kitchens shall be cast iron with integral flanges and shall extend 1 inch above
finished floor. Size sleeves for and seal space between pipe sleeve with Thunderline Link-Seal.
5. Provide steel pipe sleeves in bearing walls and masonry walls. Opening in non-bearing walls, floors
and ceilings may be 20 gauge galvanized pipe sleeves or openings cut with concrete core drill.
6. Pipe insulation shall run continuous through pipe sleeves with ¼” minimum clearance between
insulation and pipe sleeve. Provide metal jackets over insulated pipes passing through fire walls,
floors and smoke partitions. Jacket shall be 0.018 stainless steel extending 12 inches on either side
of barrier and secured to insulation with 3/8” wide band. Seal annular space between jacket and
pipe sleeves with Thunderline High Temperature Link Seal.
7. Pipe wall penetrations exposed to view shall have tight fitting escutcheons or flanges to cover all
voids around openings.
8. All below grade and exterior wall penetrations shall be installed in a pipe sleeve and sealed
between the pipe and pipe sleeve with Thunderline High Temperature Link Seal.
9. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and fill voids surrounding sleeves and interior to sleeves
around cables with Nelson “Flameseal” fire stop putty with U.L. listed 3 hour rating installed as per
manufacturers recommendations.
10. Equivalent by Dow, Chemelex, 3M.
C. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Provide and be responsible for locations of piping hangers, supports and inserts, etc., required for
installation of piping under this contract. Design of hangers and supports shall conform to current
issue of Manufacturers Standardization Society Specification (MSS) SP-58.
2. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting piping in all conditions of operation. They shall allow
free expansion and contraction of piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred
weight being induced into pipe or connected equipment. Support horizontal or vertical pipes at
locations of least vertical movement.
3. Where horizontal piping movements are such that hanger rod angularity from vertical is greater than
4 degrees from cold to hot position of pipe, offset hanger, pipe, and structural attachments to that
rod is vertical in hot position.
4. Hangers shall not become disengaged by movements of supported pipe.
5. Provide sufficient hangers to adequately support piping system at specified spacing, at changes in
piping direction and at concentrated loads. Hangers shall provide for vertical adjustment to
maintain pitch required for proper drainage, and for longitudinal travel due to expansion and
contraction of piping. Fasten hangers to building structural members wherever practicable.
6. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal steel piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM
SPACING
Up to 1-1/4” 3/8” 8 Ft.
1-1/2” to 2” 3/8” 10 Ft.
2-1/2” to 3-1/2” ½” 12 Ft.
4” and 5” 5/8” 15 Ft.
7. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings support horizontal copper tubing as follows:
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-8
NOM. TUBING SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM
SPACING
Up to 1” 3/8” 6 Ft.
1-1/4” to 1-1/2” 3/8” 8 Ft.
2” 3/8” 9 Ft.
2-1/2” ½” 9 Ft.
3” and 4” ½” 10 Ft.
8. Provide continuous threaded hanger rods wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated straps
shall be used.
9. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only, where lateral or axial pipe movement occurs
provide suitable linkage to permit swing. Provide pipe support channels with galvanized finish for
concealed locations and painted finish for exposed locations. Submit design for multiple pipe
supports indicating pipe sizes, service and support detail to Architect-Engineer for review prior to
fabrication.
10. Provide Grinnell pipe hangers for vertical pipe risers as follows:
PIPE MATERIAL PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO.
Copper ½” thru 4” CT-121
Steel ¾” thru 20” 261
11. Provide Grinnell Fig. 194, 195 or 199 steel wall brackets for piping suspended or supported from
walls. Brackets shall be prime coated carbon steel.
12. Mount hangers for insulated piping on outside of pipe insulation sized to allow for full thickness of
pipe insulation.
13. Provide Grinnell Fig. 167 insulation protection shields sized so that line compressive load does not
exceed one-third of insulation compressive strength. Shield shall be galvanized steel and support
lower 180 degrees of pipe insulation on copper tubing. Provide wood block at each pipe hanger in
thickness of insulation. Insulation vapor barrier jacket shall overlap wood block to maintain vapor
barrier.
14. Structural attachments for pipe hangers shall be as follows:
15. Provide Grinnell pipe hangers for horizontal single pipe runs as follows:
PIPE MATERIALS PIPE SIZE HANGER FIG. NO.
Copper ½” thru 4” CT-65
Steel 3/8” thru 4” 65
Steel 5” thru 30” 260
16. Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 600 channel trapeze pipe hangers for horizontal multiple pipe runs with
pipe clamps or pipe rollers as follows:
PIPE MATERIALS PIPE SIZE CLAMP NO. ROLLER NO.
Copper 3/8” thru 4” 8600 CP* 8010 CP*
Steel 3/8” thru 6” 8500 8010
*Copper Plated
17. Provide Elcen Fig. 50 pipe saddle with adjuster to support piping from floor. Provide complete with
pedestal type floor stand.
18. Provide necessary structural steel and attachment accessories for installations of pipe hangers and
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
PIPING 15100-9
supports. Where heavy piping loads are to be attached to building structure verify structural loading
with Architect-Engineer prior to installations.
19. Equivalent hangers and supports by Auto-Grip, Basic Engineer, Bee Line, Elcen, Fee & Mason,
Fluorocarbon Company, Unistrut or Super Strut Inc.
20. See attached piping schedule
END OF SECTION 15100
PIPING MATERIAL SCHEDULE
PIPING FITTINGS MAXIMUM
NORMAL
WORKING
FIELD TEST
SYSTEM SIZE TYPE SCHED. GRADE ASTM MATERIAL MATERI
AL
TYPE PRESS TEMP PRESS TIME
Building Sewer 4"-8" BS SDR-26 -- D-2241 PVC PVC NG -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Domestic Water (CW,HW, HWR) 1/2"-3/4" PEX -- -- PEX BRASS 85 100 to 140 130 lb. 1/2 hr.
Domestic Water (CW,HW, HWR) 1"-6" CPVC -- -- B-88 CPVC CPVC SJ 85 40 to 55 130 lb. 1/2 hr.
Dom. Hot and Cold Below Grade 1/2"-6" K -- -- B-88 CP CP SS 85 40 to 55 120 1/2 hr.
Drain Line All M -- -- B-88 CP CP SJ 0 40 to 80 -- --
Natural Gas 1/2"-2" SL 40 -- A-106 CS MI T 5 55 to 85 75 lb. 1/2 hr.
Natural Gas Below Grade All PE SDR-11 -- D-1248 PE PE F 30 60 100 1 hr.
Refrigerant Lines All ACR -- B-88 CP CP SS 225 30 to 125 Div. 15
Roof Drain in Plenums 4"-12" NH SV -- A-74 CI CI NH -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Roof Drain Above Grade 4"-12" S 40 -- D-2665-88 PVC PVC SW -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Roof Drain Below Grade 4"-16" S 40 -- D-2665-88 PVC PVC SW -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Soil & Waste in Plenums 1-1/2"-6" NH SV -- A-74 CI CI NH -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Soil & Waste Above Grade 2"-4" S 40 -- D-2665-88 PVC PVC SW -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
Soil & Waste Below Grade 2"-4" S 40 -- D-2665-88 PVC PVC SW -- 75 10' 1/2 hr.
ABBREVIATIONS:
BLK – Black ERW - Electric Resistant Weld MJ - Mechanical Joint PE - Polyethylene SS - Silver Solder
BS - Bell & Spigot F - Fusion Weld NG - Neoprene Gasket PP - Polypropylene SV - Service Weight
CI - Cast Iron GLV - Galvanized NH - No Hub S - Socket Joint SW - Solvent Weld
CP – Copper MECH - Mechanical PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride SJ - Solder Joint 95-5 Tin-antimony T - Threaded
CS - Carbon Steel MI - Malleable Iron PC - Rolled Grooved Pipe Coupling SL - Seamless W - Welded
DI - Ductile Iron V - Victaulic
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300-1
SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 15010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1. Provide wet or combination wet/dry sprinkler system as required, complete with alarm valves, drain
valves, mains, risers, branches, sprinkler heads, test pipes, gauges, and dialers as hereinafter
specified or shown on plans.
2. An approved automatic sprinkler subcontractor shall perform all work under this heading. The
system shall be installed in strict accordance with the National Board of Fire Underwriters latest
pamphlet No. 13, No. 14 and all local and state authorities having jurisdiction. The sprinkler system
shall be certified. Contractor shall retain certification until such time as Contractor turns copies of
certificates and permits over to Owner.
3. Sprinkler system may be installed using hydraulically designed system at Contractor’s option.
4. Design of sprinkler system shall coordinate main and branch lines with structure, ceilings, piping,
ductwork and light fixtures.
5. Entire building shall be sprinkled.
6. Contractor shall obtain flow test information from the local utility prior to submitting bid and confirm
adequate pressure is available for proposed design of system. If adequate flow/pressure is not
available contractor shall provide in their bid a fire pump sized as required to provide adequate
pressure and flow to the system design required for the building.
B. SERVICE RISER
1. Provide an RPZ principle backflow preventor as specified elsewhere in these specifications and wall
indicator valve.
C. PIPE, FITTINGS, AND HANGERS
1. Provide pipe material and schedule as required by NFPA 13. Pipe 2” and smaller shall be threaded
connected Schedule 40 black steel pipe or thicker with cast iron fittings. Pipe 2-1/2” and larger shall
be roll grooved or welded connected Schedule 10 black steel pipe or thicker. Submit detailed pipe
material submittals indicating thickness and joining methods.
2. Note: Steel pipe with wall thicknesses less than Schedule 30 (in sizes 8” and larger) or Schedule 40
(in sizes less than 8”) shall not be joined by threaded fittings.
3. All fire protection piping above ground, including sprinkler and standpipe piping, shall be Schedule
No. 40 black steel pipe. Pipe shall be scale free, round, straight and true to size, free from weld
flaws and other defects. Steel pipe shall be as manufactured by U.S. Steel, Sawhill, Wheatland,
LTV, Laclede or approved equal. All piping shall be U.L. listed and F.M. approved. Schedule 10
roll grooved pipe will also be acceptable, at Contractor’s option. All fire service piping below grade
shall be ductile iron pipe of the thickness Class 52 complete with all accessories conforming to
ANSI A21.51; ASTME A536, Grade 60-42-10. The joints shall be of the push-on type conforming to
ANSI A21.11 except gaskets shall be neoprene or other synthetic rubber. Natural rubber will not be
acceptable. The pipe shall be cement-mortar lined conforming to ANSI A21.4 and shall be coated
inside and out with a coal-tar enamel. Fittings shall be ductile iron or cast iron fittings complete with
accessories and shall be ASTM A536, Grade 80-60-03 conforming to ANSI A21.10, 150 p.s.i.
pressure rating. The joints shall be of standard mechanical joint type or of the push-on type
conforming to ANSI A21.11. All fittings shall be cement-mortar lined conforming to ANSI A21.4 and
shall be coated inside and out with a coal-tar enamel.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300-2
4. All fittings inside building shall be 125 p.s.i. steam cast iron screwed sprinkler fittings approved by
Underwriters’ Laboratories and meeting approval of Factory Mutual. Cast iron flanges, of the same
pressure rating as the fittings above specified, shall be installed in piping 8” and over, and
elsewhere where required.
5. Pipe hangers shall be of type and spacing required to support pipes from building construction and
meet the approval of the Underwriters’ Laboratories. Note: Do not support piping from pipes, ducts
or conduits. Furnish structural steel headers bolted to concrete and bolted or welded to steel joists
as required. Do not support pipes from bulb tees or steel roof decks. Support exposed risers in
stairs from structure below, as shown on drawings. Do not support risers in stairs from pipe clamps
above floor.
6. Contractor, at their option, may install fire protection piping using Victaulic couplings with gaskets,
reducing couplings and gaskets, outlet couplings, flanges with gaskets, fittings, reducers, adapter
nipples, flange adapters, bolts, nuts and miscellaneous material required to install fire protection
piping system to meet NFPA approval in lieu of screwed and flanged fittings specified above. The
piping system shall be grooved, assembled, installed and supported as covered in Victaulic Piping
and Installation Manual.
7. Contractor may use Blazemaster CPVC piping for wet system components where allowed by code
and municipality. Metallic piping shall be utilized for any system in attic space.
D. PIPE SLEEVES AND COLLARS
1. Pipes passing through walls and partitions shall be run through not less than No. 12 gauge steel
pipe sleeves finishing flush with the finished wall surfaces. Where covered pipes pass through the
walls or partitions, same shall be centered in steel pipe sleeves. All sleeves or thimbles shall be
independent of the pipes they enclose and centered in sleeves to insure free movement of the pipes
without injury to wall or other finish. Caulk around all pipes and pipe sleeves passing through walls,
floors or ceilings with untarred jute and make airtight and soundproof.
2. Covered and uncovered pipes passing through fire and smoke walls and partitions shall be run
through Proset Proseal fire rated wall sleeves, or approved equal wall sleeving system, consisting
of PVC sleeves in masonry walls, 20 Ga. G.I. split wall sleeves in gypsum walls, ceramic fiber firefill
to fill the void between the pipe and the interior wall of the sleeve, and PVC or neoprene rubber
Proseal plug on each end of sleeve.
3. Pipe passing through floors shall be run through Proset Proseal or approved equal fire rated floor
sleeve assemblies, consisting of PVC couplings, ceramic fiber firefill to fill the void between the pipe
and the interior wall of the sleeve, and PVC or neoprene rubber Proseal plug on each end of sleeve.
Sleeves shall be watertight and fireproof.
4. Pipe sleeves through outside walls shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves with 1-1/2” collar
welded to center of sleeve and cast in wall. Caulk between sleeves and pipes and make watertight.
E. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
1. Size of fire service piping is shown on drawings. All other fire protection piping shall be sized
according to hydraulic calculations to provide the prescribed densities hereinbefore specified.
2. Conceal mains back or above the construction in finished areas.
3. Pipes shall have ends reamed to full bore.
4. Piping shall clear lighting fixtures, construction, conduits, air outlets, air ducts and miscellaneous
service pipes. Piping shall be designed to provide maximum head room in all areas.
5. Piping shall not pierce ductwork.
6. Sprinkler piping shall be divided into zones.
7. Pitch all dry pipe sprinkler piping to drain according to NFPA requirements, without exception and
without traps. Wet pipe sprinkler systems may be pitched to drain or run level, but piping must be
installed straight and true, without traps.
8. Furnish and install suitable drain valves and inspector test valves as necessary to drain the system
and meet the requirements of NFPA. Furnish and install cutoff valve, vane type flow detector, test
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15300-3
valve, drain valve, sight glass and tamper switch in each sprinkler zone, of type hereinbefore
specified.
F. UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE PIPING
1. Pipe and fittings for underground fire service and for connections for fire hydrant shall be as
hereinbefore specified. Connect fire service piping to water main with tapping sleeve.
2. Provide Underwriter’s approved waterproof pipe connection at point where pipe pierces wall of
building and connects to steel pipe. Pipe connections shall be complete with bridle rods and
clamps as required to prevent blowouts and to meet Underwriters’ requirements. Support pipe
outside building concrete piers resting on rock or undisturbed soil, and provide waterproof sleeves
and caulking as specified for water services under Plumbing Section.
3. Pour concrete anchor blocks for underground pipes as required by the authorities having jurisdiction
to prevent blowouts. Provide bridle rods and clamps where cast iron pipe changes to steel pipe,
and anchor piping to concrete blocks as required to prevent blowouts. Anchor blocks shall be sized
as per NFPA requirements.
4. Underground piping shall have 48” cover minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. All modifications and additions shall be performed without hampering the proper operation of the
remaining system. Shop drawing submittals shall indicate by calculation total system compliance.
2. Provide installation of water flow switches and tamper switches on bypass lines and shut-off valves.
Wiring by Electrical Contractor. Coordinate with early warning fire detection system.
3. Submit drawings and calculations to the State Fire Marshall, owner’s insurance company and local
building officials for approval.
B. TESTS
1. All piping shall be tested and made tight to meet requirements of NFPA Pamphlets No. 13 and 14
before joints are covered. Such tests shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative and the
Architect. Provide three (3) copies of test certificates to Architect-Engineer.
2. Furnish all gauges, pumps, compressors and equipment required to perform tests.
C. PAINTING
1. Paint post indicator valve, fire hydrant and all pipes and valves not in furred walls or ceilings with
one (1) metal prime coat and one (1) coat of Cook’s Armocote No. 801 or approved equal high
gloss enamel, color as directed.
END OF SECTION 15300
PLUMBING 15400-1
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 15010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. ELECTRICAL WORK REQUIRED
1. Contractor shall provide electrical connections for any equipment that requires electrical
connections for power or control. Electrical requirements and work shall be coordinated with
Electrical Contractor.
C. PIPING SYSTEMS
1. Refer to Section 15100 of this specification for piping material specifications and installation
instructions. Specific piping materials and joining methods for systems installed under this section
shall be as listed in schedule.
D. PIPING SYSTEMS VALVES
1. Refer to Section 15140 of this specification for valve type specifications and installation instructions.
E. PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION
1. Refer to Section 15100 for insulation type specifications and installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1. FLOOR DRAINS
1.1. Drains shall be type and style listed below. Unless indicated otherwise provide each drain
that does not have an integral “P” trap with a deep seal cast iron “P” trap in connecting
piping.
1.1.1. Equivalent drains by J.R. Smith, Zurn, Watts, Wade or Josam.
2. CLEANOUTS
2.1. Provide cleanout the full size of soil pipe served up to 4” I.D. Cleanouts for soil lines larger
than 4” shall be 4”. Provide cleanouts in base of soil pipe stacks, ends of sewer main, at
changes in direction of over 45 degrees and in horizontal pipe runs exceeding 100 feet at 50
foot intervals.
2.2. Install cleanouts so they are accessible by extending them through walls, and floors, to
outside of building, or to above grade as required.
2.3. Where exterior cleanouts do not occur in sidewalks, paved roadways, etc., provide a
concrete pad 18” x 18” x 6” thick with top 1-1/2” above finished grade.
2.4. Floor (Concrete Floor Finish):
2.4.1. Wade #W-6000-XS cast iron cleanout with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze
top, adjustable above to finished floor.
2.5. Floor (Quarry Tile Floor Finish):
2.5.1. Same as concrete floor finish.
2.6. Floor (Tile Floor Finish):
2.6.1. Wade #W-6000-TS cast iron cleanout with square heavy duty nickel bronze top,
recessed for tile and adjustable to finished floor.
2.7. Floor (Carpet Floor Finish):
2.7.1. Wade #W-6000-XS-72 cast iron cleanout with round, heavy duty nickel bronze top with
carpet retainer and adjustable to finished floor after concrete has set.
PLUMBING 15400-2
2.8. Wall:
2.8.1. Wade #W-8450-C cleanout with dura-coated cast iron ferrule and cadmium plated cast
iron counter-sunk plug complete with round smooth nickel bronze wall access cover and
flush over-wall frame.
2.9. Verify floor materials used from Architectural plans and provide proper cleanout tops, where
they occur in carpet, quarry tile, vinyl tile or ceramic tile.
2.10. Equivalent drains by J.R. Smith, Zurn, Watts, Wade or Josam.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1. All plumbing fixtures shall be cleaned and free of all construction debris.
2. Electric water cooler shall be protected during construction.
3. Any chrome trim with wrench marks shall be removed and new trim installed.
4. Architect-Engineer reserves the right to reject any plumbing fixture.
5. See plans for Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
END OF SECTION 15400
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-1
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. All contract documents including drawings, alternates, addenda and modifications and general provisions of
the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and all other Division Specification Sections,
apply to work of this section. All preceding and following sections of this specification division are applicable
to the Electrical Contractor, all sub-contractors, and all material suppliers.
B. SCOPE OF WORK
1. This DIVISION requires the furnishing and installing of complete functioning Electrical systems, and each
element thereof, as specified or indicated on Drawings or reasonably inferred, including every article, device
or accessory reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the
equipment specified. Elements of the Work include materials, labor, supervision, supplies, equipment,
transportation, and utilities.
2. Refer to Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and all other contract documents and to relevant
equipment drawings and shop drawings to determine the extent of clear spaces and make all offsets required
to clear equipment, beams and other structural members to facilitate concealing conduit in the manner
anticipated in the design.
C. SPECIFICATION FORM AND DEFINITIONS
1. The Engineer indicated in these specifications is Pearson Kent McKinley Raaf Engineers LLC. 8801
Ballentine, Suite 200, Overland Park, KS 66214, PHONE 913-492-2400, FAX 913-492-2437, EMAIL
admin@pkmreng.com.
2. Contractor, wherever used in these specifications, shall mean the Company that enters into contract with the
Owner to perform this section of work.
3. When a word, such as “proper”, “satisfactory”, “equivalent”, and “as directed”, is used, it requires the
Architect-Engineer’s review.
4. "PROVIDE" means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect, connect, test, and turn over to Owner,
complete and ready for regular operation, the particular Work referred to.
5. "INSTALL" means to join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up, or otherwise connect together before testing and
turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation, the particular Work referred to.
6. "FURNISH" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories,
and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application for the particular Work
referred to.
7. "WIRING" means the inclusion of all raceways, fittings, conductors, connectors, tape, junction and outlet
boxes, connections, splices, and all other items necessary and/or required in connection with such Work.
8. "CONDUIT" means the inclusion of all fittings, hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.
9. "AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Architect/Engineer, or his representative.
10. "CONCEALED" means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall furring or within
double partitions, or installed above hung ceilings.
D. QUALIFICATIONS
1. The contractors responsible for work under this section shall have completed a job of similar scope and
magnitude within the last 3 years. The contractors shall employ an experienced, competent and adequate
work force licensed in their specific trade and properly supervised at all times. Unlicensed workers and
general laborers shall be adequately supervised to insure competent and quality work and workmanship
required by this contract and all other regulations, codes and practices. At all times the contractors shall
comply with all applicable local, state and federal guidelines, practices and regulations. Contractor may be
required to submit a statement of qualifications upon request before any final approval and selection. Failure
to be able to comply with these requirements is suitable reason for rejection of a bid.
E. LOCAL CONDITIONS
1. The contractor shall visit the site and determine the existing local conditions affecting the work required.
Failure to determine site conditions or nature of existing or new construction will not be considered a basis for
granting additional compensation.
F. CONTRACT CHANGES
1. Changes or deviations from the contract documents; including those for extra or additional work must be
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-2
submitted in writing for review of Architect-Engineer. No verbal change orders will be recognized.
G. LOCATIONS AND INTERFERENCES
1. Locations of equipment, conduit and other electrical work are indicated diagrammatically by electrical
drawings. Layout work from dimensions on Architectural and Structural Drawings. Verify equipment size
from manufacturers shop drawings.
2. Study and become familiar with contract drawings of other trades and in particular general construction
drawings and details in order to obtain necessary information for figuring installation. Cooperate with other
workmen and install work in such a way to avoid interference with their Work. Minor deviations, not affecting
design characteristics, performance or space limitation may be permitted if reviewed prior to installation by
Architect-Engineer.
3. Any conduit, apparatus, appliance or other electrical item interfering with proper placement of other work as
indicated on drawings, specified, or required, shall be removed, relocated and reconnected without extra cost.
Damage to other Work caused by this contractor, subcontractor, workers or any cause whatsoever, shall be
restored as specified for new work.
4. Do not scale electrical drawings for dimensions. Accurately layout work from dimensions indicated on
Architectural drawings unless they are found to be in error.
H. PERFORMANCE
1. Final acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus and
appliances operate satisfactorily as designed and intended. Work shall include required adjustment of
systems and control equipment installed under this specification division.
2. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect-Engineer the quality of materials, equipment,
workmanship and operation of equipment provided under this specification division for a period of one year
from and after completion of building and acceptance of mechanical systems by Owner.
I. WARRANTY
1. The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect-Engineer that upon notice from them within a one year
warranty period following date of acceptance, that all defects that have appeared in materials and/or
workmanship, will be promptly corrected to original condition required by contract documents at Contractor’s
expense.
2. The above warranty shall not supersede any separately stated warranty or other requirements required by law
or by these specifications.
J. ALTERNATES
1. Refer to General Requirements for descriptions of any alternates that may be included.
K. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS
1. The intent of these specifications is to allow ample opportunity for the Contractor to use their ingenuity and
abilities to perform the work to their and the Owner’s best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in
bidding on standards of materials and equipment required.
2. Material and equipment installed under this contract shall be first class quality, new, unused and without
damage.
3. In general, these specifications identify required materials and equipment by naming one or more
manufacturer’s brand, model, catalog number and/or other identification. The first named manufacturer or
product is used as the basis for design; other manufacturers named must furnish products consistent with
specifications of first named product as determined by Engineer. Base bid proposal shall be based only on
materials and equipment by manufacturers named, except as hereinafter provided.
4. Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required items of first quality, adequate
in every respect for intended use. Such items shall be submitted to Architect-Engineer for review prior to
procurement.
5. Materials and equipment proposed for substitutions shall be equal to or superior to that specified in
construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color as determined by Architect-Engineer whose
decision shall be final and without further recourse. Physical size of substitute brand shall be no larger than
space provided including allowances for access for installation and maintenance. Requests must be
accompanied by two copies of complete descriptive and technical data including manufacturer’s name, model
and catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions, operating characteristics and any other
information needed for comparison.
6. If the Contractor wishes to incorporate products other than those named in the Base Bid Specifications they
shall submit a request for approval of equivalency in writing no later than (10) ten calendar days prior to bid
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-3
date. Substitutions after this may be refused at Engineers option. Equivalents will ONLY be considered
approved when listed by addendum.
7. In proposing a substitution prior to or subsequent to receipt of bids, include in such bid the cost of altering
other elements of this project, including adjustments in mechanical or electrical service requirements
necessary to accommodate such substitution.
8. Within 10 working days after bids are received, the apparent low bidder shall submit to the Architect-Engineer
for approval, three copies of a list of all major items of equipment they intend to provide. Within 30 working
days after award of Contract, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for equipment and materials to be
incorporated in work, for Architect-Engineer review. Where 30-day limit is insufficient for preparation of
detailed shop drawings on major equipment or assemblies, Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s
descriptive catalog data and indicate date such detailed shop drawings will be submitted along with
manufacturer’s certification that order was placed within 30 working day limit.
L. ELECTRONIC PLAN FILES
1. Electronic files of the contract documents may be available from the Engineer to successful bidders and
manufacturers for a fee of $50 per sheet, $100 minimum and $25 email/shipping charge. A release of liability
form will be required along with payment prior to release of files.
M. OPENINGS, ACCESS PANELS AND SLEEVES
1. This Contractor shall include the installation of all boxes, access panels and sleeves for openings required to
install this work, except structural openings incorporated in the structural drawings. Sleeves shall be installed
for all conduits passing through structural slabs and walls. Contractor shall set and verify the location of
sleeves that pass through beams, as shown on structural plans. All floor and wall penetrations shall be
sealed to meet fire-rating requirements.
2. All penetrations through interior or exterior and rated or non-rated walls and floors shall be appropriately
sealed prevent entry and movement of rodents and insects. Contractor shall coordinate their work with all
other trades.
N. ARCHITECTURAL VERIFICATION AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Contractor shall consult all Architectural Drawings and specifications in their entirety incorporating and
certifying all millwork, furniture, and equipment rough-in including utility characteristics such as voltage,
phase, amperage, pipe sizes, duct sizes, including height, location and orientation. Shop drawings
incorporating these requirements should be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to installation or
rough in.
O. EXTENT OF CONTRACT WORK
1. Provide electrical systems indicated on drawings, specified or reasonably implied. Provide every device and
accessory necessary for proper operation and completion of electrical systems. In no case will claims for
“Extra Work” be allowed for work about which Electrical Contractor could have been informed before bids
were taken.
2. Electrical Contractor shall be familiar with equipment provided by other Contractors that require electrical
connections and control. Follow circuiting shown on drawings for lighting, power and equipment connections.
3. Make required electrical connections to equipment provided under Architectural and Mechanical divisions of
this project.
P. CODES, ORDINANCES, RULES AND REGULATIONS
1. Provide work in accordance with applicable rules, codes, ordinances and regulations of Local, State, Federal
Governments, and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
2. Conform to latest editions and supplements of following codes, standards or recommended practices.
Q. SAFETY CODES:
1. National Electrical Safety Code Handbook H30 - National Bureau of Standards
2. Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHA) Department of Labor
3. Safety Code for Elevators ANSI A17.1
R. NATIONAL FIRE CODES:
1. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code
2. NFPA No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code
3. NFPA No. 101 Life Safety Code
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-4
S. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.:
1. All materials, equipment and component parts of equipment shall bear UL labels whenever such devices are
listed by UL.
T. MISCELLANEOUS CODES:
1. ANSI A117.1 - Handicapped Accessibility
2. ASHRAE 90.1 1989
3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
U. STANDARDS
1. Drawings and specifications indicate minimum construction standard, should any work indicated be sub-
standard to any ordinances, laws, codes, rules or regulations bearing on work, Contractor shall promptly
notify Architect/Engineer in writing before proceeding with work so that necessary changes can be made.
However, if Electrical Contractor proceeds with work knowing it to be contrary to any ordinances, laws, rules,
and regulations he shall thereby have assumed full responsibility for and shall bear all costs required to
correct non-complying work.
V. PERMITS/FEES
1. Electrical Contractor shall secure and pay for necessary permits and certificates of inspection required by
governmental ordinances, laws, rules or regulations. Keep a written record of all permits and inspection
certificates and submit two copies to Architect/Engineer with request for final review.
2. Contractor shall include in bid any charges by local utility providers to establish new services to the structure.
Coordinate with the utility suppliers to verify exact which part of the work is to be performed by whom.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. COORDINATION
1. Certain materials will be provided by other trades. Examine the Contract Documents to ascertain these
requirements.
2. Carefully check space requirements with other trades and the physical confines of the area to insure that all
material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto including finished suspended ceilings and the spaces
within the existing building. Make modifications thereto as required and approved.
3. Transmit to other trades all information required for work to be provided under their respective Sections in
ample time for installation.
4. Wherever work interconnects with work of other trades, coordinate with other trades to insure that all trades
have the information necessary so that they may properly install all the necessary connections and
equipment. Identify all items of work that require access so that the ceiling trade will know where to install
access doors and panels.
5. Coordinate, project and schedule work with other trades in accordance with the construction sequence.
6. The Drawings show only the general run of raceways. Any significant changes in order to meet field
conditions shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect/Engineer and receive his approval
before such alterations are made. All such modifications shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.
7. Obtain from the Architect/Engineer in the field the location of such outlets or equipment not definitely located
on the Drawings.
8. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, pull boxes, fixtures, etc. to accommodate the work to prevent
interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route and location of each raceway
prior to fabrication.
8.1. Right-of-Way:
8.1.1. Lines that pitch have the right-of-way over those that do not pitch. For example: steam,
condensate, and plumbing drains normally have right-of way. Lines whose elevations cannot
be changed to have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.
8.1.2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction in raceways as required to maintain proper
headroom in pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings.
9. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional Detail Drawings to scale similar to that of the
bidding Drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the same size as Contract Drawings. With these layouts,
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-5
coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Such detailed work to be clearly identified on the Drawings
as to the area to which it applies. Submit for review Drawings clearly showing the work and its relation to the
work of other trades before commencing shop fabrication or erection in the field.
10. Coordinate with the local Electric Utility Company and the local Telephone Company as to their requirements
for service connections and provide all necessary materials, labor and testing.
11. Coordinate with contractors for work under other Divisions of this specification for all work necessary to
accomplish this contractor's work.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Contractor shall furnish a minimum of six sets of shop drawings of all materials and equipment.
Architect-Engineer will retain three sets.
2. Contractor shall submit two sets of prints of all fabrication drawings. Cost of drawing preparation, printing and
distribution shall be paid for by the contractor and included in his base bid.
3. Where catalog cuts are submitted for review, conspicuously mark or provide schedule of equipment,
capacities, controls, fitting sizes, etc. that are to be provided. Mark each submitted item with applicable
section and sheet number of these specifications, or plan sheet number when item does not appear in the
specifications. Where equipment submitted does not appear in base specifications or specified equivalent,
mark submittals with applicable alternate numbers, change order number or letters of authorization. Each
submittal shall contain at least two sets of original catalog cuts. Each catalog sheet shall bear the equipment
manufacturer’s name and address. All shop drawings on materials and equipment listed by UL shall indicate
UL approval on submittal.
4. Contractor shall check all shop drawings to verify that they meet specifications and/or drawings requirements
before forwarding submittals to the Architect-Engineer for their review. All shop drawings submitted to
Architect-Engineer shall bear contractor’s approval stamp that shall indicate that Contractor has reviewed
submittals and that they meet specification and/or drawing requirements. Contractor’s submittal review shall
specifically check for but not be limited to the following: equipment capacities, physical size in relation to
space allowed; electrical characteristics, provisions for supply, return and drainage connections to building
systems. All shop drawings not meeting Contractor’s approval shall be returned to their supplier for re-
submittal.
5. No shop drawing submittals will be considered for review by the Architect-Engineer without Contractor’s
approval stamp, or that have extensive changes made on the original submittal as a result of the Contractor’s
review.
6. The shop drawing submittal dates shall be at least as early as required to support the project schedule and
shall also allow for two weeks Architect-Engineer review time plus mailing time plus a duplication of this time
for re-submittal if required. Submittal of all shop drawings as soon as possible before construction starts is
preferred. Submit the number of shop drawings required by the General Conditions but not less than 6
copies. All shop drawings submitted shall contain the following: The project name, the applicable
specification section and paragraph, the submittal date, the Contractor's stamp which shall certify that the
stamped drawings have been checked by the Contractor, comply with the drawings and specifications and
have been coordinated with other trades. Submittals not so identified will be returned without action for re-
submittal.
7. The Architect's-Engineer’s checking and subsequent approval of such drawings, schedules, literature, or
illustrations shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications
unless he has, in writing, called the Architect's-Engineer’s attention to such deviations at the time of
submission, and secured their written approval; nor shall it relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors
in dimensions, details, size of members, or omissions of components for fittings; or for coordinating items with
actual building conditions and adjacent work.
8. Any corrections or modifications made by the Architect-Engineer shall be deemed acceptable to the
Contractor at no change in price unless written notice is received by the Architect-Engineer prior to the
performance of any work incorporating such corrections or modifications.
9. Shop drawings that require re-submission shall have the items that were revised "flagged" or in some other
manner marked to call attention to what has been changed.
10. Before submitting shop drawings and material lists, verify that all equipment submitted is mutually compatible
and suitable for the intended use. Verify that all equipment will fit the available space and allow ample room
for maintenance. If the size of equipment furnished makes necessary any change in location, or
configuration, submit a shop drawing showing the proposed layout.
11. Architect-Engineer’s review of shop drawings will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from
drawings and specifications unless the Architect-Engineer has specifically approved such deviations in
writing, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors in shop drawings. No work shall be
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-6
fabricated until Architect-Engineer’s review has been obtained. Any time delay caused by correcting and re-
submitting shop drawings will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
C. SUBMITTALS
1. Contractor shall provide the following submittal sections that apply to this project:
1.1. SECTION 16010 – ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS:
1.1.1. Test methods and data
1.2. SECTION 16050 – BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS:
1.2.1. Tests and Data
1.3. SECTION 16110 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES:
1.3.1. Conduits
1.3.2. Outlet Pull and Junction Boxes
1.3.3. Floor boxes
1.4. SECTION 16120 – WIRE AND CABLE:
1.4.1. Conductors and Cables
D. RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. A. During construction, keep an accurate record of all deviations between the work as shown on Drawings
and that which is actually installed. Keep this record set of prints at the job site for review by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Upon completion of the installation and acceptance by the owner, transfer all record drawing information to
one neat and legible set of prints. Then deliver them to the Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.
E. PREMIUM TIME WORK
1. The following Work shall be performed at night or weekend other than holiday weekends as directed and
coordinated with the Owner.
1.1. All tie-in, cut-over and modifications to the existing electrical system and other existing system
requiring tie-ins or modifications shall be arranged and scheduled with the Owner to be done at a time
as to maintain continuity of the service and not interfere with normal building operations.
F. CLEANING UP
1. Contractor shall take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc., resulting from the installation
of his work. Contractor shall remove from the premises each day all debris, boxes, etc., and keep the
premises clean.
2. Contractor shall clean up all fixtures and equipment at the completion of the project.
3. All switchboards, panelboards, wireways, trench ducts, cabinets and enclosures shall be thoroughly
vacuumed clean prior to energizing equipment and at the completion of the project. Equipment shall be
opened for observation by the Architect/Engineer as required.
G. WATERPROOFING
1. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs, machine room floors,
basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary, perform it prior to the waterproofing and
furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required. Advise the Architect/Engineer and obtain written permission
before penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown on the Drawings.
2. If Contractor penetrates any walls or surfaces after they have been waterproofed, he shall restore the
waterproof integrity of that surface as directed by the Architect/Engineer at his own expense
H. CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. Contractor shall do cutting and patching of building materials required for installation of work herein specified.
Cut no structural members without Architect’s approval and in a manner approved by him.
2. Patching shall be by contractors of particular trade involved and shall meet approval of Architect.
3. Drilling and cutting of openings through building materials requires Architect’s review and approval. Make
openings in concrete with concrete hole saw or concrete drill. Use of star drill or air hammer for this work will
not be permitted.
4. Damage of building finishes caused by installation of electrical equipment, fixtures, outlets and other electrical
devices shall be repaired at Contractor’s expense to approval of Architect.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-7
I. SETTING, ADJUSTMENT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
1. Work shall include mounting, alignment and adjustment of systems and equipment. Set equipment level on
adequate foundations and provide proper anchor bolts and isolation as shown or specified. Level, shim, and
grout equipment bases as recommended by manufacturer. Mount motors, align and adjust drive shafts and
belts according to manufacturer’s instruction. Equipment failures resulting from improper installation or field
alignment shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
2. Floor or pad mounted equipment shall not be held in place solely by its own dead weight. Include anchor
fastening in all cases.
3. Provide electrical floor mounted equipment with 3-1/2” high concrete bases unless shown or specified
otherwise. Electrical contractor shall size all pads. General contractor shall form all pads, provide and place
all concrete for said pads. Individual concrete pad shall be no less than 4” wider and 4” longer than
equipment, and shall extend no less than 2” from each side of equipment.
4. Provide each piece of equipment or apparatus suspended from ceiling or mounted above floor level with
suitable structural support, platform or carrier in accordance with best recognized practice. Electrical
contractor shall arrange for attachment to building structure, unless otherwise indicated on drawings or as
specified. Provide hangers with vibration eliminators where required. Contractor shall verify that structural
members of building are adequate to support equipment. Submit details of hangers, platforms and supports
together with total weights of mounted equipment to Architect/Engineer for review before proceeding with
fabrication or installation.
5. Provide 3-1/2” high concrete housekeeping pad as specified above where two or more conduits penetrate
floor below panelboards.
J. START-UP, CHANGEOVER, TRAINING AND OPERATION CHECK
1. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for training Owner’s operating personnel to operate and maintain
systems and equipment installed. Keep a record of training provided to Owner’s personnel listing the date,
subject covered, instructor’s name, names of Owner’s personnel attending and total hours of instruction given
each individual.
2. All owner training sessions shall be orderly and well organized and shall be video taped using VHS format.
At the end of the owner training, the “training tape” shall become the property of the Owner.
K. FINAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
1. At final construction review, Electrical Contractor and the major sub-contractors shall be present or shall be
represented by a person of authority. Each Contractor shall demonstrate, as directed by Architect/Engineer,
that the work complies with purpose and intent of plans and specifications. Respective Contractor shall
provide labor, services, instruments or tools necessary for such demonstrations and tests.
END OF SECTION 16010
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 16010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. CLEANING AND PAINTING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1. Contractor shall thoroughly vacuum out all dirt, duct and debris from inside of equipment and shall thoroughly
clean outside and inside of equipment.
2. Touch-up painting and refinishing of factory applied finishes shall be by Electrical Contractor. Contractor
shall be responsible for obtaining proper type of painting materials and color from equipment manufacturer.
3. Unless specified otherwise factory built equipment shall be factory painted. Paint shall be applied over
surfaces only after they have been properly cleaned and coated with a corrosion resistant primer.
4. After installation, damage to painted surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed with primers equal to
factory materials. Finish coating shall be same color and type as factory finish.
5. Where extensive refinishing is required equipment shall be completely repainted.
B. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1. Perform necessary excavation to receive work. Provide necessary sheathing, shoring, cribbing, tarpaulins,
etc. for this operation, and remove at completion of work. Perform excavation in accordance with appropriate
section of these specifications, and in compliance with OSHA Safety Standards.
2. Excavate trenches of sufficient width to allow ample working space, and no deeper than necessary for
installation work.
3. Conduct excavations so no walls or footings are disturbed or injured.
4. Backfill excavations made under or adjacent to footing with selected earth or sand and tamp to compaction
required by A/E.
5. Mechanically tamp backfill under concrete and pavings in 6” layers to 95% standard density, Reference
Division 2.
6. Backfill trenches and excavations to required heights with allowance made for settlement.
7. Tamp fill material thoroughly and moistened as required for specified compaction density.
8. Dispose of excess earth, rubble and debris as directed by Architect.
9. When available, refer to test hole information on architectural drawings or specifications for types of soil to be
encountered in excavations.
C. FIRE BARRIERS
1. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and fill voids surrounding sleeves and interior to sleeves around
piping with Nelson “Flameseal” fire stop putty with U.L. listed 3 hour rating installed as per manufacturers
recommendations.
2. Equivalent by Dow, Chemelex, 3M.
3. All holes or voids created by the electrical contractor to extend conduit or wiring through fire rated floors and
walls shall be sealed with an intumescent material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times when exposed to
temperatures of 250 degrees F. It shall have ICBO, BOCAI and SBCCI (NRB 243) approved ratings to 3
hours per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). Acceptable Material: 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, Strip and sheet forms.
D. TEMPORARY COVERINGS
1. Provide temporary covering as required to keep same free from damage due to moisture, plaster, paint,
concrete or other foreign materials. Any equipment with finish damaged by moisture, paint, plaster or other
foreign materials shall be cleaned and refinished as directed by the Architect without additional cost to the
Owner.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2
2. All temporary openings in conduits shall be covered with metal or plastic caps.
E. SLEEVES
1. Provide proper type and size sleeves to General Contractor for electrical ducts, busses, conduits, etc.
passing through building construction. Supervise installation to insure proper sleeve location. Unless
indicated or approved install no sleeves in structural members.
2. Provide cast iron sleeves extending 1 inch above finished floor where sleeves pass through floors subject to
flooding such as toilet rooms, bathrooms, equipment rooms and kitchen. Seal opening between pipe and
sleeve with Thunderline Corp. Link Seal.
3. Unless specified otherwise provide 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeves through floors and non-bearing
walls. Where piping passes through exterior walls, equipment room walls, air plenum walls and walls
between areas that must be isolated from occupied areas, seal space between sleeves and piping, air or
water tight are required with Thunderline Corp. Link Seal.
4. Provide O-Z Electrical Manufacturing Co., Inc. Type “FSK” or “WSK” or equivalent thruwall and floor seals
where conduits pass through concrete foundation walls below grade.
5. Provide Zurn Z-195 or equivalent flashing sleeve through walls and floors with waterproof membrane. Seal
annular space between conduit and sleeve with Thunderline Link Seal or O-Z type CSM sealing bushing.
6. All holes or voids created by the electrical contractor to extend pipe through fire rated floors and walls shall be
sealed with an intumescent material capable of expanding up to 8 to 10 times when exposed to temperatures
of 250 degrees F. It shall have ICBO, BOCAI and SBCCI (NRB 243) approved ratings to 3 hours per ASTM
E-814 (UL 1479). Acceptable Material: 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Putty, Strip and sheet forms.
F. FIRE BARRIER
1. Provide sleeves through all fire-rated walls and fill voids surrounding sleeves and interior to sleeves around
cables with Nelson “Flameseal” fire stop putty with U.L. listed 3 hour rating installed as per manufacturers
recommendations.
2. Equivalent by Dow, Chemelex, 3M.
END OF SECTION 16050
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-1
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. The general provisions of the contract including General and Special Conditions and General Requirements
shall apply to all work under this Section.
B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1. Provide complete raceways systems, boxes and fittings for all required electrical systems.
C. STANDARDS
1. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1.1. Rigid Steel Conduit
1.1.1. U.L. Standard UL-6
1.1.2. A.N.S.I. C80-1
1.1.3. Federal Specification WW-C-581E
1.2. Intermediate Metallic Conduit
1.2.1. U.L. Standard UL-1242
1.2.2. Federal Specification WW-C-581E
1.3. Electrical Metallic Tubing
1.3.1. U.L. Standard UL-797
1.3.2. A.N.S.I. C80-3
1.3.3. Federal Specification WW-C-563
1.4. Flexible Steel Conduit
1.4.1. U.L. Standard UL-1
1.5. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit
1.5.1. U.L. Standard UL-360
1.6. Non-Metallic Conduit
1.6.1. U.L. Standard UL-651
1.6.2. A.N.S.I. Standard F512
1.6.3. N.E.M.A. Standard TC-2
1.6.4. Federal Specifications GSA-FSS and W-C-1094-A
1.7. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
1.7.1. U.L. Standard UL-870
1.8. Rigid Aluminum Conduit
1.8.1. A.N.S.I. C80.5
D. SUBMITTALS
1. Provide manufacturer's catalog cuts of fittings.
2. Where wireways and/or auxiliary gutters are employed full erection drawings must be submitted. Drawings to
include plan views, elevations, size of wireways, type and quantity of conductors proposed to be installed
therein, etc.
3. Indicate duct banks or multi-trade coordinated shop drawings.
4. Submit shop drawings or catalog descriptive data on boxes exceeding twenty-four (24")inches for any one
dimension.
5. Submit shop drawings or catalog descriptive for floor boxes and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. RACEWAY TYPES
1. Standard Threaded Rigid Steel Conduit.
1.1. Rigid conduit heavy wall galvanized.
1.2. Threaded type fittings: "Erickson" couplings where threaded cannot be used.
2. Intermediate Metallic Conduit
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-2
2.1. Light weight rigid steel conduit.
2.2. Threaded type fittings: "Erickson" couplings where threaded cannot be used.
3. Electrical Metallic Tubing
3.1. Continuous, seamless tubing, galvanized or sheradized on the exterior, coated on the interior with a
smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish, or enamel.
3.2. Couplings and connectors:
3.2.1. Indoor and two (2") inches in size and smaller, shall be steel set-screw type fittings.
3.2.2. 2-1/2 inch size and larger must employ steel compression gland fittings.
3.2.3. Outdoor shall be raintight steel compression gland fittings.
3.3. Indent type fittings shall not be used.
3.4. All connectors shall have insulated throat.
3.5. Where installed in slab or concrete work, provide approved concrete tight fittings.
4. Flexible Steel Conduit
4.1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked, double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside,
forming smooth internal wiring channel.
4.2. Maximum length: (six 6) feet.
4.3. Each section of raceway must contain an equipment grounding wire bonded at each end and sized as
required. Provide connectors with insulating bushings.
4.4. Steel squeeze-type or steel set screw type fittings.
5. Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit
5.1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, insert water-tight plastic outer jacket.
5.2. Cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece brass grounding bushings
which thread to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and
nylon insulated throat.
6. Non-Metallic Raceway
6.1. Composed of polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90 degrees C. Provide rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) type
EPC 40 heavy wall plastic conduit meeting current NEMA Standard TC-2. Conduit shall be listed UL
651 for underground and exposed use.
6.2. Raceway, fittings, and cement must be produced by the same manufacturer who must have had a
minimum of ten (10) years experience in manufacturing the products.
6.3. Materials must have a tensile strength of 7,000-7,200 psi at 73.4 degrees F., flexural strength of
12,000 psi and compressive strength of 9,000 psi.
6.4. All joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
7. Duct Banks
7.1. Provide duct banks and concrete encasements for both interior and exterior work as indicated on the
Drawings and for all circuits in excess of 600 volts and as otherwise indicated.
7.2. Concrete shall be minimum fc = 3,000 pounds per square inch.
7.3. Support raceways installed in duct banks every five (5) feet to assure correct alignment.
7.4. Terminate raceways with flared bells to enable ease of pulling cable and to eliminate stress on the
cable. Free bells and raceway terminations of burrs and rough edges.
7.5. Provide concrete markers at grade where duct banks are stubbed out for future use.
7.6. Install utility duct banks not less than thirty (30") inches below grade top elevation.
7.7. Provide rigid steel elbows for vertical risers.
7.8. Provide vinyl tracer ribbon twelve (12") inches above each duct bank buried in backfill.
8. Aluminum Conduit
8.1. Do not use aluminum conduit unless specifically indicated on the drawings for special purposes.
B. LOCKNUTS AND BUSHINGS
1. Locknuts shall be steel. Die cast locknuts shall not be used.
2. All bushings shall be insulated. Use nylon insulated metallic bushings for sizes 1" and larger. Plastic bushings
may be used in 1/2" and 3/4" sizes.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-3
C. OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES
1. Cast Type Conduit Boxes, Outlet Bodies and Fittings
1.1. Provide surface mounted outlet and junction boxes, in indoor locations, where exposed to moisture
and in outdoor locations.
1.2. Use Ferrous Alloy boxes and conduit bodies with Rigid Steel or IMC.
1.3. Use Ferrous Alloy or cast aluminum boxes and conduit bodies with Electrical Metallic Tubing.
1.4. Covers: Cast or sheet metal unless otherwise required.
1.5. Tapered threads for hubs.
2. Sheet Steel Boxes Indoors
2.1. No. 12 USS gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side less than forty (40") inches, and
maximum area not exceeding 1,000 square inches; riveted or welded 3/4 inch flanges at exterior
corners.
2.2. No. 10 USS gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side forty (40") to sixty (60") inches, and
maximum area 1,000 to 1,500 square inches; riveted or welded 3/4 inch flanges at exterior corners.
2.3. No. 10 USS gauge sheet steel riveted or welded to 1-1/2 by 1-1/2" by 1/4" welded angle iron
framework for boxes with a maximum side exceeding sixty (60") inches and more than 1,500 square
inches in area.
2.4. Covers
2.4.1. Same gauge steel as box.
2.4.2. Subdivided single covers so no section of cover exceeds fifty (50) pounds.
2.4.3. Machine bolts, machine screws threaded into tapped holes, or sheet metal screws as
required; maximum spacing twelve (12") inches.
2.5. Paint
2.5.1. Rust inhibiting primer; ANSI No. 61 light gray finish coat.
2.6. Where size of box is not indicated, size to permit pulling, racking and splicing of cables.
2.7. For Boxes over 600 Volts
2.7.1. Provide insulated cable supports and removable steel barriers to isolate each feeder. Stencil
cable voltage class in red letters on the front cover of the box.
2.7.2. Braze a ground connector suitable for copper cables to the inside of the box.
3. Pull and Splice Boxes, Outdoors
3.1. Aluminum reinforced, with removable covers secured by brass machine screws.
3.2. Where size of box is not indicated, size to permit pulling, racking, and splicing of the cables.
3.3. Braze a ground connector suitable for copper cables to the inside of the box.
4. Junction Box, Sidewalk Type
4.1. Cast iron, hot-dipped galvanized with threaded conduit entrance hubs, flanged, reinforced checkered
cover, gasketed with pry bar slots and countersunk stainless steel screws.
5. Floor Boxes
5.1. General
5.1.1. Class I, water-tight, normal depth cast iron construction Type I, fully adjustable, for use in
concrete.
5.1.2. Multiple Gang or Combination.
a. Rectangular type partitions for separating power from communication sections.
5.2. Floor Box Covers
5.2.1. Rugged construction, impervious to cleaning detergents.
5.2.2. Compatible with floor covering.
5.2.3. Brushed aluminum finish for flush mounting.
5.2.4. Providing continuous ground path to box.
5.2.5. Provide carpet flange in carpeted areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS
1. The following applications must be adhered to except as otherwise required by Code. Raceways not
conforming to this listing must be removed by this Contractor and replaced with the specified material at this
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-4
Contractors expense.
1.1. Rigid Steel - Application: Where exposed to mechanical injury, where specifically required, exterior
exposed locations, and where required by codes and for all circuits in excess of 600 volts.
1.2. I.M.C. - Application: Same as standard threaded rigid steel conduit.
1.3. E.M.T. - Applications: Use in every instance except where another material is specified. EMT shall not
be used underground or in slab on grade.
1.4. Flexible Steel - Applications: Use in dry areas for connections to lighting fixtures in hung ceilings,
connections to equipment installed in removable panels of hung ceilings at bus duct takeoffs, at all
transformer or equipment raceway connections where sound and vibration isolation is required.
1.5. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit - Applications: Use in areas subject to moisture where flexible steel is
unacceptable at connections to all motors, and all raised floor areas.
1.6. Non-Metallic Conduit - Application: Schedule 40 - Where specifically indicated on the drawings and for
raceways in slab or below grade. All bends shall be made with steel elbows and wrapped unless the
bend is encased in concrete.
1.7. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters - Application: Where indicated on the Drawings and as otherwise
specifically approved.
B. RACEWAY SYSTEMS IN GENERAL
1.1. Provide raceways for all wiring systems, including security, data transmission, paging, low voltage et.
al. 277/480 volt wiring shall be kept independent of 120/208 volt wiring. Emergency system wiring
shall be kept independent of the normal system wiring. Where non-metallic raceways are utilized,
provide sizes as required with the grounding conductor considered as an insulated additional
conductor. Wiring of each type and system must be installed in separate raceways.
1.2. Install capped bushings on raceways as soon as installed and remove only when wires are pulled.
Securely tie embedded raceway in place prior to embedment. Lay out the work in advance to avoid
excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs.
1.3. Locate raceways so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and they do not conflict with
the services of other trades. Install one (1") inch or larger raceways, in or through structural members
(beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in the manner accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Draw up
couplings and fittings full and tight.
1.4. Install no conduits or other raceways sized smaller than permitted in applicable NEC Tables. Where
conduit sizes shown on drawings are smaller than permitted by code, Contractor shall include cost for
proper size conduit in his base bid. In no case reduce conduit sizes indicated on drawings or
specified without written approval of Architect-Engineer.
1.5. Above-grade raceways to comply with the following:
1.5.1. Install raceways concealed except at surface cabinets and for motor and equipment
connection in electrical and mechanical rooms. Install a minimum of six (6") inches from
flues, steam pipes, or other heated lines. Provide flashing and counter-flashing for
waterproofing of raceways, outlets, fittings, etc., which penetrate the roof. Route exposed
raceways parallel or perpendicular to building lines with right-angle turns and symmetrical
bends. Run concealed raceways in a direct line and, where possible, with long sweep bends
and offsets. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs, and partitions for
passage of raceways. Waterproof sleeved raceways where required.
1.5.2. Raceways shall not be run on roofs or exposed on the outside of the buildings unless
specifically noted as exposed on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1.5.3. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways with necessary
bonding conductor at building expansion joints and between buildings or structures and
where required to compensate for raceway or building thermal expansion and contraction.
Provide expansion fittings every 200 feet on outdoor conduit.
1.5.4. Provide one (1) empty 3/4 inch raceway for each three (3) spare unused poles or spaces of
each flush-mounted panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4 inch conduit in a junction box, which
after completion, is accessible to facilitate future branch circuit extension.
1.5.5. Provide raceway installation (with appropriate seal-offs, explosion-proof fittings, etc.) in
special occupancy area, as required. Provide conduit seal-offs where portions of an interior
raceway system pass through walls, ceiling, or floors which separate adjacent rooms having
substantially different maintained temperatures, as in refrigeration or cold storage rooms.
1.5.6. Provide pull string in spare or empty raceways. Allow five (5) feet of slack at each end and in
each pull box. Tie each end of the string to a washer or equivalent that does not fit into the
conduit. Tag both ends of string denoting opposite end termination location.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-5
1.6. Below Grade
1.6.1. Below grade raceways to comply to the following:
a. Do not penetrate waterproof membranes unless proper seal is provided.
1.6.2. Protect steel raceway in earth or fill with two (2) coats of asphalt base paint. Touch up
abrasions and wrench marks after conduit is in place.
1.6.3. In lieu of the above, protect steel raceways with a minimum of ten (10) mil tape approved for
the purpose and overlapped a minimum of one-half tape width to provide a minimum twenty
(20) mil thickness.
1.7. No raceway may be installed in a concrete slab or members except with the permission of the
Structural Engineer and with the written consent of the Owner.
1.7.1. Conduits embedded in structural concrete slabs shall have an outside diameter less than one
third of the thickness of the concrete slab and shall be installed entirely within the center one
third of the concrete slab.
1.7.2. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs shall be spaced not less than eight (8") inches on
centers and as widely spaced as possible where they converge at panels or junction boxes.
1.7.3. In no case will installation of raceways be permitted to interfere with the proper placement of
principal reinforcement.
1.7.4. Raceways running parallel to slab supports, such as beams, columns, and structural walls,
shall be installed not less than twelve (12") inches from such supporting elements.
1.7.5. To prevent displacement during concrete pour of lift slab, saddle supports for conduit, outlet
boxes, junction boxes, inserts, etc., shall be secured with suitable adhesives.
1.8. Non-metallic raceway installation shall conform to the following:
1.8.1. All joints are to be made by the solvent cementing method using the material recommended
by the raceway manufacturer. To insure good joints, components shall be cleaned prior to
assembly.
1.8.2. Raceway cut-offs shall be square and made by handsaw or other approved means which
does not deform the conduit. Raceway shall be reamed prior to solvent cementing to
couplings, adapters, or fittings.
1.8.3. Electrical devices which are served by PVC raceways shall be grounded by means of a
ground wire pulled in the raceway.
1.8.4. Bends shall be made by methods that do not deform or damage the conduit. The radii of field
bends shall not be less than those established by the N.E.C.
1.8.5. Raceway expansion fittings shall be provided where necessary. The position of the
expansion fitting shall be adjusted proportional to the temperature at installation.
1.8.6. Raceway supports shall be installed, in such a manner, to allow the PVC conduit to slide
through the supports as the temperature changes.
1.8.7. Elbows must be galvanized rigid steel, intermediate metallic conduit or concrete encased.
Plastic conduit may only be used for exterior underground applications or circuits beneath
slabs on grade. Provide galvanized rigid steel (GRS) radius bends and risers as conduits
rise above grade or above floor slab.
1.8.8. Provide exterior underground conduit with metal detection strip.
1.8.9. Provide matching plastic fittings. Fittings shall meet the same standards and specifications
as the conduit on which it is installed.
1.8.10. Joining and bending of conduit and installation of fittings shall be done only by methods
recommended.
1.8.11. Provide conduit support spacing as recommended for the highest ambient temperature
expected.
1.8.12. Provide interlocking conduit spacers for multiple runs of underground conduits installed in
same trench.
1.8.13. Provide expansion couplings on long runs regardless of ambient temperatures. Determine
amount of conduit expansion and contraction from published charts or tables.
1.8.14. Test workmanship by conducting a low-pressure air (3.0-5.0 psi) test after system is installed
and cemented joints are set. Plug and block ends to prevent movement prior to
pressurization. Check for leaks at all joints with a soap solution. Even low-pressure air can
cause high thrust loads and caution must be observed. The test shall be observed by the
architect, engineer or owner’s representative, prior to backfill. All below grade conduit that
could potentially drain water into electrical equipment (ie. Main electrical service located in
basement below utility transformer) must be watertight.
1.9. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. This shall be done with ball
mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit inside diameter) followed by close fitting wire brush
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16110-6
and wad of felt, or similar material. This assembly may be pulled in together with, but ahead of, the
cable being installed. All empty raceways shall be similarly cleaned. Clear any raceway which rejects
ball mandrel.
1.10. Support raceways at intervals no greater than ten (10) feet and with one support within three (3) feet of
each coupling, box, fitting, or outlet box. Provide one support within three (3) feet of each elbow or
bend.
2. OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULLBOXES
2.1. Provide outlet, junction, and pullboxes as indicated on the drawings and as required for the complete
installation of the various electrical systems, and to facilitate proper pulling of wires and cables. J-
boxes and pullboxes shall be sized per electrical code minimum. Boxes on empty conduit systems
shall be sized as if containing conductors of #4 AWG.
2.2. Floor Boxes
2.2.1. Prior to Concrete Pour
a. Firmly support boxes.
b. Adjust leveling screws to insure box covers are flush with finished floor.
c. Plug unused opening with proper fittings and seal joints with compound for exclusion
of concrete and moisture.
2.2.2. After Concrete Pour
a. As soon as traffic is permitted on slab, remove any accumulation of water and
foreign matter to avoid corrosion and rust.
b. Insure covers are flush with finished floor.
c. Install cover plates and accessories after floor finishing materials have been
installed.
END OF SECTION 16110
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
WIRE AND CABLE 16120-1
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. The general provisions of the contract including General and Special Conditions and General Requirements
shall apply to all work under this Section.
B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1. Provide 600 volt insulated wire and cable.
C. STANDARDS
1. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1.1. General: Underwriters' Laboratories labeling of all insulation and jackets.
1.2. Rubber Insulated Wire and Cables
1.2.1. ICEA pub. No. S-19-81 (NEMA Pub. No. WC 3): Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.2.2. UL 44: Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables.
1.3. Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cables
1.3.1. ICEA pub. No. 1 S-61-402 (NEMA Pub. No. WC 3): Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable
for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.3.2. UL 83: Wires, Thermoplastic-Insulated.
1.4. Cross-Linked Thermosetting-Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cables
1.4.1. ICEA pub. No. S-66-524: (NEMA Pub. No. WC 7): Cross-Linked Thermosetting-Polyethylene-
Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.4.2. UL 44: Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables.
1.4.3. UL 854: Service-Entrance Cables.
1.5. Annealed Copper Wire for Conductors
1.5.1. ASTM B-3: Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
1.6. Insulation Thickness for Individual conductors
1.6.1. N.E.C. Table 310-13: Conductor Application and Insulation.
D. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1. Deliver wire and cable to job site on reels or coils marked in accordance with N.E.C. Section 310-11.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. WIRE AND CABLE
1. General
1.1. Provide wire with a minimum insulating rating of 600 volts, except for wire, used in 50 volts or below
applications for control of signal systems use 300 volt minimum or 600 volt where permitted to be
incorporated with other wiring systems.
2. Conductor
2.1. Electrical grade annealed copper, tinned if rubber insulated, and fabricated in accordance with ASTM
standards. Minimum size # 12 for branch circuits and # 14 for control wiring.
2.2. The conductors illustrated on the drawings are copper. Except as otherwise noted.
3. Stranding.
3.1. # 12 and # 10 solid.
3.2. Cables larger than # 10, stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations.
3.3. Control wires stranded in accordance with ASTM Class B stranding designations.
4. Insulated Single Conductors
4.1. Type THHN/THWN - Frame retardant: Heat-resistant thermoplastic insulation, nylon jacket rated for
90 C dry/75C wet operation. Use for branch circuit wiring.
4.2. Use type THHN/THWN or RHW or XHHW, rated for 90 C, for feeder circuits.
5. Color Coding
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
WIRE AND CABLE 16120-2
5.1. Provide consistent color coding of all circuits as follows:
Phase 120/208 277/480
A Black Brown
B Red Orange
C Blue Yellow
N White Gray
Grd Green W/Wht Stripe Green W/ Ylw Stripe
5.2. Substitutions for Color-Coded Wire: with approval of Owner's Representative and where color coding
cannot be readily provided because of limited quantities involved, either of the following:
5.2.1. Plastic tape applied spirally and half-lapped over exposed portions of conductors within
manholes, boxes, and similar enclosures.
5.2.2. Colored tubing cut and inserted over ends of wire prior to installing terminals.
B. CONNECTORS
1. Make connections, splices, and taps and joints with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically secure.
Protect exposed wires and connecting devices with electrical tape or insulation to provide protection not less
than that of the conductor.
C. ELECTRICAL TAPE
1. Specifically designed for use as insulating tape.
2. Super 33+ Scotch vinyl electrical tape as manufactured by 3M.
D. LUBRICANT
1. Use lubricant where the possibility of damage to conductors exists. Use only a lubricant approved by the
cable manufacturer and one which is compatible with cable and raceways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. WIRE AND CABLE
1. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway system. All conductors of all systems shall be installed
in a raceway system.
2. Use No. 12 AWG, minimum. For branch circuits whose conductor length from panel to furthest outlet exceeds
100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits, use number 10 or larger.
3. Do not install wire in incomplete conduit runs or until after the concrete work and plastering is completed and
moisture is swabbed from conduits. Eliminate splices wherever possible. Where necessary, splice in readily
accessible pull, junction, or outlet box.
4. Flashover or insulation value of joints shall be equal to that of the conductor. Provide Underwriters'
Laboratories listed connectors rated to 600 volts for general use and 1,000 volts for use between ballasts and
lamps or gaseous discharge fixtures.
5. Use terminating fittings, connectors, etc., of a type suitable for the specified cable furnished. Make bends in
cable at termination prior to installing compression device. Make fittings tight.
6. Apply an anti-oxide inhibitor equivalent to "Penetrox" (Burndy) or "Noalox" (Ideal) to aluminum terminations.
7. Extend wire sizing for the entire length of a circuit, feeder, etc. unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. INSTALLATION
1. General
1.1. Provide tools, equipment, and materials to pull all wire and cable into place and to make required
splices and termination.
1.2. Provide grounding conductors #6 and smaller with green insulation. Provide grounding conductors
larger than #6 identified with green vinyl tape.
2. Wire and Cable in Conduit, Duct or Wireway
2.1. Utilize roller bearing swivel to prevent twisting of cable entering conduit or duct.
2.2. Take precautions to avoid entrance of dirt and water into conduit and ducts.
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
WIRE AND CABLE 16120-3
2.3. Clean existing conduits and ducts to remove any pulling compound prior to pulling new cables.
2.4. Do not damage conductor insulation, braid jacket or sheath.
2.5. Do not bend conductors to less than manufacturer's recommended radius.
2.6. Make splices only in pull boxes, junction boxes and outlet boxes.
2.7. Utilize cable reels on jacks for pulling through pull boxes, ducts and conduits so bends will not be
excessive and conductors will not touch sharp edges; use feeding tube where required.
2.8. For large diameter cables, utilize properly sized pulling grips (endless woven basket two to four feet
long of ductile steel).
2.9. Do not exceed maximum recommended pulling tension of wire and cable.
3. Splices, Terminations, and Connections
3.1. General: Except where lugs are furnished with equipment, provide terminals and connectors suitable
for quantity, conductor size and direction of entry (top or bottom).
3.2. Insulated Flanged Terminals: Install for connection of conductors No. 12 AWG and smaller to device
terminals; do not exceed three terminals at single connections.
3.3. Circumferential Compression Type Connectors: Install for splices and connections No. 4 AWG and
larger.
3.3.1. Use for incoming and outgoing cable connections at enclosures and for ground connections.
3.3.2. Use manufacturer's approved tool and correct hex head that embosses die number on
connector lug.
3.3.3. Make crimped indentations parallel with conductor.
3.3.4. Fill voids and irregularities with insulation putty.
3.3.5. Cover neatly with four (4) layers of vinyl plastic tape except where insulated covers are
permitted; half-lap tape in two directions.
3.3.6. Use spring-held bakelite covers over splices or taps only with approval of Owner's
Representative.
C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Testing
1.1. Test system wiring for continuity, grounds and short circuits prior to connection of any equipment.
1.2. Test final equipment connections for continuity of grounds and short circuits.
1.3. Correct faults and replace sections with faulty insulation.
1.4. Demonstrate installation is free of grounds and short circuits and that insulation resistance complies
with ICEA values.
2. Test direct burial cables after completion of backfilling.
END OF SECTION 16120
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
GROUNDING 16450-1
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Reference Section 16010.
2. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1. Provide grounding electrodes, conductors, connections and equipment to provide a solidly grounded
electrical system.
C. STANDARDS
1. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
1.1. Underwriters Laboratory Standard No. U.L. 467.
1.2. ANSI C-1 1978.
1.3. IEEE Standards No. 142-1982, 1100-1992 and No. 80.
1.4. National Electrical Safety Code.
1.5. NFPA.
D. SUBMITTALS
1. Submit test reports certifying resistance values for buried or driven grounds and water pipe grounds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS
1. Ground Cables: green color coded, insulated, annealed stranded tinned copper wire as indicated on
Drawings; insulated wire to conform with requirements of Section 16120.
2. Mechanical Connectors: Tin-plated aluminum alloy, UL approved and stamped for use with aluminum or
copper conductors.
3. Ground Rods:
3.1. Copper-clad steel fabricated by molten welding process.
3.2. Diameter: 5/8 Inch. Use 3/4" for rocky soil.
3.3. Length: 8 feet.
4. Ground Lugs and Connectors for Cable Tray: Tin-plated aluminum alloy suitable for use with aluminum or
copper conductors.
B. GENERAL
1. Grounding systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the local authorities, and
subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
2. All ground wires and bonding jumpers shall be stranded copper installed in conduit. All ground wires shall
be without joints and splices over its entire length.
3. The system neutral shall be grounded at the service entrance only, and kept isolated for grounding
systems throughout the building.
4. Each system of continuous metallic piping and ductwork shall be grounded in accordance with the
requirements of the National Electrical Code.
5. Mechanical equipment shall be bonded to the building equipment grounding system. This shall include
but is not limited to, fans, pumps, chillers, etc.
6. PVC conduits and portions of metallic piping and duct systems which are isolated by flexible connections,
insulated couplings, etc., shall be bonded to the equipment ground with a flexible bonding jumper, or
separate grounding conductor.
7. Metal raceways, cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings and other metal
noncurrent-carrying parts that are to serve as grounding conductors shall be effectively bonded where
necessary to assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be
imposed on them. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads,
contact points, and contact surfaces or be connected by means of fittings so designed as to make such
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
GROUNDING 16450-2
removal unnecessary.
C. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS
1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided for separately derived systems and shall be grounded
to building steel, cold water pipes, etc., or an alternate grounding means.
D. RECEPTACLES
1. Receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet box by means of a bonding jumper between the outlet box
and the receptacle grounding terminal.
E. CONCENTRIC KNOCKOUTS
1. Provide grounding type bushings for conduits terminated through multiple concentric knockouts not fully
knocked out, on inside of electrical enclosures. Install bonding jumper between ground bushing and
enclosure
F. TOGGLE SWITCHES
1. Provide grounding clip on each toggle switch. Mount over device mounting strap such that contact is
made between mounting strap, screw, faceplate and outlet box.
2. Provide devices with ground screw and bond to switch box.
G. GROUNDING METHODS
1. The metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded.
2. A metal underground water piping system used for grounding shall be in direct contact with the earth for
ten feet or more and shall be electrically continuous. Provide bonding jumpers at water meter and at
insulated joints.
3. Steel reinforcing bars used for grounding shall be encased by at least two inches of concrete, located
within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth.
Reinforcing bars shall be minimum 1/2 inch diameter and consisting of twenty feet of one or more steel
reinforcing bars.
4. All bonding jumpers for the above grounding systems shall be sized in accordance with National Electrical
Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION
1. Cold Water Pipe Grounding:
1.1. Make connection with clamp type fitting; do not damage water pipe.
1.2. Bond ground conductor and its conduit to water pipe.
1.3. Install No. 4/0 AWG bonding jumper with ground clamps around water meter.
2. Ground Conductors:
2.1. Size as shown on Drawings or as required by National Electrical Code. Grounding conductors shall
be as shown on plans or if not specifically shown shall be no smaller than that required by the
NEC.
2.2. Where ground cables are required, install insulated copper ground conductors in steel conduit, or
as indicated.
2.3. Where ground cable is installed in metallic conduit, bond cable to conduit at both ends.
2.4. Connect ground conductors in cables and in conduit to appropriate ground buses (as in
switchgear, motor control centers, and distribution panelboards) or directly to metallic enclosure if
no ground bus is provided.
3. Service Ground
3.1. Connect system neutral ground and equipment ground system to common ground bus.
3.2. Ground secondary services at supply side of each individual secondary disconnecting means and
at related transformers in accordance with National Electric Code.
3.3. Provide each service disconnect enclosure with neutral disconnecting means which interconnects
with insulated neutral and uninsulated equipment ground sub to establish system common ground
point.
3.4. Neutral disconnecting links shall be located so that low voltage neutral bar with interior secondary
neutrals can be isolated from common ground bus and service entrance conductors.
4. Conduit Attachment to Electrical Equipment:
2013.037 / Carmel Senior Living, Carmel, Indiana (Footings and Foundations)
GROUNDING 16450-3
4.1. Ground conduits to metal framework of electrical equipment with double locknuts or grounding
bushings and bonding jumpers unless otherwise noted.
4.2. Install bonding jumpers at all electrical equipment to provide continuous ground return path
through conduit.
4.3. Install bonding jumpers across expansion fittings between conduit sections for ground path
continuity.
4.4. Equipment grounding conductors for branch circuit home runs shown on the drawings shall
indicate an individual and separate ground conductor for that branch circuit which shall be
terminated at the branch circuit panelboard, switchboard, or other distribution equipment. No
sharing of equipment grounding conductors sized according to the size of the overcurrent device
and NEC Table 250-95 shall be allowed.
4.5. Required equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in compliance with N.E.C.
Table 250-95.
4.6. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided with green type TW 600 volt insulation.
Related feeder and branch circuit grounding conductors shall be connected to ground bus with
approved pressure connectors.
4.7. Provide feeder servicing several panelboards with a continuous grounding conductor connected to
each related panelboard ground bus. Installation shall include necessary precautions regarding
terminations with dissimilar metals.
5. CIRCUITING
5.1. Provide low voltage distribution system with a separate green insulated equipment grounding
conductor for each single or three-phase feeder.
5.2. Single phase 120 volt branch circuits for lighting and power shall consist of phase and neutral
conductors and a green ground conductor installed in common metallic conduit which shall serve
as grounding conductor.
5.3. Provide flexible metallic conduit utilized in conjunction with above single phase branch circuits with
suitable green insulated grounding conductors connected to approved grounding terminals at each
end of flexible conduit.
5.4. Single phase branch circuit installed in nonmetallic conduits shall be provided with separate
grounding conductor.
5.5. Install grounding conductor in common conduit with related phase and/or neutral conductors.
5.6. Where parallel feeders are installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green
insulated equipment grounding conductor.
6. Receptacles and Switches:
6.1. Install bonding jumpers between outlet box and receptacle grounding terminal except where
contact device or yoke is provided for grounding purposes.
7. Wireways:
7.1. Install grounding jumpers for bonding between wireway and other panelboards, conduit,
switchgear, motor control centers, and at any other point where solid connection would otherwise
not provided in supporting system to insure continuous ground.
8. Pull Boxes, Junction Boxes and Enclosures:
8.1. Connect all equipment grounding conductors together and connect to the box.
B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Resistance Values for System and Equipment Grounds: for each ground rod and ground grid.
1.1. Acceptable Testing Equipment: Vibroground by Associated Research, Inc.; or Megger Earth Tester
by James G. Biddle Co.
1.2. Method: Three (3) electrode fall of potential as prescribed by instrument manufacturer.
1.3. Drive additional ground rods spaced eight feet apart, if necessary, until total resistance of system
is measured at five ohms or less.
END OF SECTION 16450